JP2022116831A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine represented by a rotary-drum game machine (slot machine) and a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) in which whether or not a movable body unit is electrically connected normally is easily checked.SOLUTION: A first movable body unit 700 having a first movable body 110 that can be operated by driving a first motor 110m is electrically connected to light emitting means 24ML, and a second movable body unit 180 having a second movable body 182 that can be operated by driving a second motor 180m is also electrically connected to the light emitting means 24ML. The light emitting means 24ML may emit light by manually operating the first movable body 110 to drive the first motor 110m in a power-off state and may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body 182 to drive the second motor 180m in the power-off state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by reel game machines (slot machines) and pinball game machines (pachinko machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, slot machines and pachinko machines are known as one of the game machines. The slot machine uses a predetermined number of game media and operates a start lever to perform a lottery for determining an internal winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, and rotate a plurality of reels to determine a winning combination. The reels are stopped based on the internal winning combination and the operation result of the stop button, and a profit is given according to the winning combination determined according to the mode of the stopped reels.

Also, in a pachinko machine, it is common to provide obstacles that change the direction of the game ball's fall, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. that allow the game ball to win in the game area of the game board. is. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a prize ball.

Some of these game machines are provided with a movable body unit having a movable body that can be moved by being driven by a motor (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-92786

However, in the conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in checking whether or not the movable units are electrically connected normally.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that makes it easy to check whether or not the movable units are electrically connected normally.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object,
light emitting means;
a first movable body unit having a first movable body operable by being driven by a first motor;
a second movable body unit having a second movable body operable by being driven by a second motor;
A game table comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means,
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it becomes easier to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 3; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 9. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect; (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pushed down in the state shown to 17 (h). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step how the effect image display device 157 and various lamps appear when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed. 16 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 15; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening/closing piece is pressed while the demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode is selected. FIG. 10 shows. 18 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 17; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed and to set the power saving mode is performed step by step. FIG. 10 shows. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring. It is a figure which shows two examples of operation production|presentation. FIG. 2 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows concretely some examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using Fig.22 (a). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.22(b). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using FIG.22(c). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.22(d). It is a figure which shows the other example of operation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect; It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with types of internal winning combinations. 31(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, and (b) is a transition diagram of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a flow of a main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 38; FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 40; FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG. 38. FIG. 42. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG. (e) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG. 42; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting a confrontation mode. (b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting an aura start zone. 42. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point specialization state B transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. be. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. 42; (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for obtaining an item "Defeat 1 body", (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the defeat rate by the "defeat rate UP" item, and (c) is an AT remaining FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game number lottery table, (d) is a diagram showing an AT direct hit lottery table, (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo BB lottery table, and (f) is an AT additional game number lottery. It is a figure which shows a table. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a state update process (step S117) in FIG. 38; FIG. 49(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of point acquisition processing (step S1A01) in FIG. 49, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 49, (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. c) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the flow of precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 49; FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the flow of confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. 49. FIG. 49. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 49, and (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production|presentation control processing (step S309) in FIG. 57(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of display point management processing (step S3003) in FIG. 56, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the flow of display item management processing (step S3005) in FIG. 56; FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the flow of item acquisition effect setting processing (step S3207) in FIG. 58. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation executed from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state; The flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the confrontation state will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and transitions to the confrontation state. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is a confrontation state, and (d) to (f) are diagrams of an item use effect when the effect state is a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows an example, (g) is a figure which shows the state which the showdown production|presentation started. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of winning all the confrontation production|presentations. It is a figure which shows the example when it loses in confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation performed before it transfers to a pseudo-BB state or an initial state from AT state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before using (deleting) the item; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification when power failure and power recovery occur; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution time of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the panel attack production|presentation of Example L1 of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a small winning symbol notification effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect from a first stop operation to a third stop operation in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means at the time of a 2nd error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing 1st error notification and 2nd error notification. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the 3rd error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 1st error notification and the 3rd error notification are performed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means at the time of the 4th error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing the 4th error display. It is the figure which showed the flow from lever ON to error cancellation|release when the 4th error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 4th error display is performed. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the item given in point specialization state production, and the point corresponding to each item. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 3rd addition production|presentation (refill production of the refill production) in the point specialization state production|presentation in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after the slot machine is powered off and restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display area of the symbol display window and the winning lines of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; 3 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to the embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, and a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter; b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a reel rotating device of a slot machine according to this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a reel driving unit that constitutes the reel rotating device of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4A is a schematic side view and a schematic front view showing a state in which the reel drive unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment is assembled; 3 is an exploded perspective view of a stepping motor used for reels of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the magnetic pole arrangement of the stator of the stepping motor shown in FIG. 126; FIG. It is a table|surface which shows the content of the excitation table which excites the stepping motor which concerns on this embodiment. It is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing by a main controller of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; 131 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the internal winning combination lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 130; 131 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG. 130; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of stop button display control processing in step S207 shown in FIG. 133; FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation control processing in step S208 shown in FIG. 133; FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel control determination processing in step S208g shown in FIG. 135; FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG. 136; 137 is a flow chart showing in detail a first constant speed control process in step S308 shown in FIG. 136; FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail second constant-speed control processing in step S310 shown in FIG. 136; FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing in detail stop button acceptance processing in step S208d shown in FIG. 135; FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail a pull-in counter setting process in step S208d5 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. 136; FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail brake control processing in step S312 shown in FIG. 136; FIG. (a) is the first sub-controller main process of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, (b) is the first sub-controller command input process, (c) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt process, and ( d) is a flow chart showing the flow of each timer interrupt process of the first sub-controller. Changes in the state of the three reels in the conventional method, changes in the detection state of the light shielding pieces provided on each reel in the index sensor, changes in the state in which the stop button corresponding to each reel can be operated, and each stop button 4 is a timing chart showing changes in light emission mode of a built-in light emitter; In this embodiment, changes in the states of the reels 110-112, changes in the detection state of the respective light shielding pieces, changes in the state in which the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, and light emission modes of the stop button LEDs 137a-139a. is a timing chart showing changes in . 4 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 4 is a timing chart when step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a power failure and power recovery occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a timing chart when the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment detects the light shielding piece and stops the game at the shortest number of frames; FIG. It is a figure which shows the state of the left reel in each timing. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a reel-related effect is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st production|presentation in a production|presentation apparatus. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when slide push operations are performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, but only part of the operations are accepted. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when all slide push operations performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when the real game is played after the pseudo game is played. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when the main game is played after the reel action is performed. It is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols forming a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, but only some of the operations are accepted. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT; 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 that constitutes the push button 600. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a push button 600; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the push button 600; 6 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of a substrate 700 is perpendicular to the pressing direction of a button body 610; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display on the effect image display device 157. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation;

1 to 30, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 1 to 30 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 1 to 30 in principle. In the description using FIG. 30, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

2, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting section and a light receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 2 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, among the lines shown in FIG. 2, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines becomes effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 becomes effective. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board housing case 210 . On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 9) is arranged. be. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 9) is provided. ) is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252 . The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. Connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting with the main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 9) are provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. FIG. Also, the reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112 . These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m and 112m (see FIG. 9) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m-112m is a stepping motor. The left reel 110 will be described below as an example, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are the same. A motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the belt-shaped member 710 of the reel 110 are mounted on a mounting base 732. ing.

5A is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 5B is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (the positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) which are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 3 will be described in detail. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 6A is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotating portion 190a, and a circular rotating portion 190a protruding outward from the rotating portion 190a. and an indicator 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the instruction section 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A, for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 6(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 6(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", it means that the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is represented by a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, selects a numerical value visible from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 (hex 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 6(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 6(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, selects the position of the sliding portion 192b of the slide switch 192 (0 to F in hexadecimal). Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 6(a) to 6(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 6D is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 6(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as a confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to detect which of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 has been operated. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 6(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 6(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 6(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. As shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after one game is finished and the game is not restarted. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the power saving mode is set when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 7A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 6A.

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7A displays that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 7(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 6(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7B, characters of "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 7(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C), characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 7(D) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7D displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 7(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(a) displays the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 7(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 6(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(b) displays the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 7B and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 7A are the same.

FIG. 7A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 7(a), characters of "volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five-level volume level is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is illuminated in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 7(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 7(a) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 7(a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 7(a), characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the five-step volume level is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the setting value (18) in the 7th stage and the setting value (127) in the 7th stage. In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the volume level selection value is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth level. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (eg, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without taking over the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 9) provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 for driving, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor 180m (see FIG. 9) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (active line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Each component of the main controller 300 described above is mounted on the main controller substrate 300B (see FIG. 9).

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163m (see FIG. 9) of the shutter 163. As shown in FIG. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-controller 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-controller board 400B (see FIG. 9).

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 9 shows a power control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 9 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . 9 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B has the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4, to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected, and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 700 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

A 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line are also shown on the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 9, there are also a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current flows, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current flows. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. The movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The direct current of 24V and the direct current of 5V supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 8, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may be in a state where no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 9 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, as shown in FIG. 10, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 9) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The light is induced by an induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The light is induced by an induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown in 9 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the right reel 112 can be manually rotated in the power failure state. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 11(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 9 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 11(a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals and a disk-shaped hopper disc 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181 . Part of the hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 11(a). The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passage holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole of a size through which medals, which are game media, can pass. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by the motor 180m (see FIG. 9), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passage holes 1821.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 11(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passage holes 1821 can be seen. Even in the power-off state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in both forward and reverse directions by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821 .

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the motor 180m (see FIG. 9) that rotates the hopper disk 182 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The light is induced by an induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or the connector MC1, no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. However, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

After that, the induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 flows through the power control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B in the same way as the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the substrates 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, similarly to when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated while the power is off, the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated increases, so that the monitor LED emits bright light. Become.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1 can be manually opened and closed.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 9) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The light is induced by an induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection is suspected.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 9 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 12, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 12, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700. It is

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 12, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are broken or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Also, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, etc. LED does not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 12, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 9 by providing the hopper relay board 901B and reel relay board 902B. It is more likely that a poor physical connection will occur. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182 and the shutter 163 are used as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

The same applies to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30, and the movable body includes the sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 30), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a de-energized state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 30) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are turned on by this induced current if normal. do. Also, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P passes through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 30) and flows to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 30). If there is, LEDs provided on the substrates 182P and 160P are turned on. Furthermore, as the movable body, two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-controller, and the effect movable body (for example, Kroon) that is driven by the motor whose rotation is controlled by the main controller. It may be a production movable body or the like.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off.

After the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance is installed, whether or not the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The power failure state may be a state in which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [eg reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [eg hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [eg effect movable body unit 160U] (same hereafter).

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 9 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 11) that relays the board and the movable unit. 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the amusement machine electrically checks whether the harness is properly connected or whether the harness is disconnected. It can be checked even if it is disconnected.

The board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control boards 300B and 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control boards 400B and 160P and second sub-control boards. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B, a reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, a plurality of harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). In some cases, light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, light emission continues due to the charge stored in the capacitor].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed even if the movable body is stopped from being operated manually, and the light emission of the light emitting means can be easily confirmed. .

again,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by comprising a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC]. 』
also explained.

A common electronic component called a capacitor can be used to make it easier to check the light emission of the light emitting means.

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 9 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 11) that relays the board and the movable unit. 』
was also explained.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the common light emitting means. It can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [eg, the middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [eg, the motor 111m].

again,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A detachable harness (for example, harness MR1 and harnesses MR1 to MR3, or harness MR11 and harness MR12, or harnesses MR11 to MR31 and harnesses MR12 to 32) connecting the substrate and the first motor is provided. playground. 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor. harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the third movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
In a power-off state, the light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [eg, an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game table comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emission is used to determine whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when each movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable body unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power failure state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally and to confirm whether the second movable unit is normally connected only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means. It becomes easy to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among signal monitoring LEDs, 7-segment indicators, set value indicators, etc.];
Can be operated by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disc 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, cloon, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game table comprising
The movable unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The movable unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when power is cut off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when power is cut off.

After installing the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the plurality of light emitting means. It can be confirmed even when the game machine is in a power failure state. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is confirmed whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game table is in a power failure state. can be done. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power line of a first voltage [for example, 24 V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line of a second voltage [for example, 5 V]. may be connected to The first light emitting means is provided on a first board [eg, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [eg, power supply control board 252B]. may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

again,
"The first light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control boards 300B and 156P, the first sub-control boards 400B and 160P, the power supply control boards 252B and 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine comprising a detachable harness [for example, a harness for supplying power of both 24V and 5V] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to visually confirm the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

again,
"The first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [eg, main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first substrate and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [for example, a harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
A game machine comprising: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit and the first substrate and the first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected normally.

again,
``The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when it is energized [for example, always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
``The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is confirmed whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by causing the current to flow through the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means respectively. becomes easier to do.

FIG. 13 shows a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect.

A predetermined time period during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously during the game or after the game ends. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to display the demonstration animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, an opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 turns white once, after which the corporate logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. The company logo appears in full. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear begins. First, an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(b). Also, when an animation in which a character appears is started, a first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration effect. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, non-demonstration animations may also be displayed. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the letters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. It is suggested that the output sound from 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted in volume. As described with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B, when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and the volume level of the five steps is increased by one step. In addition, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 14(a) indicates that 8 medals are paid out when the symbol combination of Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the activated line described with reference to FIG. - It is shown that three medals are paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It also shows that two medals are paid out if the cherry symbol stops at the middle symbol. This payout table consists of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 14(a) is the first page. The first guide display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guide display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, black characters of "move page" are displayed in contrast to the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that you can change the paytable page by doing. When the left button 167 is pressed once while the second guide display icon GI2 is displayed, the payout table page is returned by one page, and when the right button 168 is pressed once, the payout table page is advanced by one page. In addition, the characters "END" are displayed in white against the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the non-demonstration animation starts to be displayed. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demonstration animation is started.

The first guide display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 13B, an animation in which a princess appears (demo animation 3/5) shown in FIG. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Further, in the demo animation, the animation in which the princess appears is followed by the animation in which the old man appears (demonstration animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 13(d). In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. At the end of the demonstration animation, an ending animation (demonstration animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(e), and the first guide display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demonstration animations ends, and if the demonstration production continues, the above-mentioned opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) returns, the entire screen turns white again, and after that, a series of animations Demonstration animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 15A, the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the head seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 continuously during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game ends. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation".) In addition, in this non-demonstration animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the hands of the old man move.In addition, this non-demonstration animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demonstration animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. Button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown in FIG. The first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 15(a) are illuminated white.

The lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be turned off. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, among the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 6), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 15A, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 15 , in order to operate the first selection switch 190 , the store clerk inserts the key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102 . Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message indicating that the door is open. An error annunciation sound is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door being opened". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. Not a few players think that the error notification sound is too loud for other players to hear. Therefore, there is a case where the store clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor does not detect the opening of the front door 102, and the door opening error is not notified. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 15(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the switch operation (1) is performed by the store clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 16 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, time elapses from left to right in the figure, the timing of (c) in FIG. 16 coincides with the timing of FIG. 15(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 16 matches the timing of FIG. 15(e). FIG. 16 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance lamp built into the first chance button 165. The lighting modes of various lighting means such as the second effect lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. .

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 16, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation with normal brightness, and also displays the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "volume 7/7". is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above various light emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 15(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 16, the effect image display device 157 displays a non-demonstration animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "exhibition volume". It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state. FIG. 15(d) shows the state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 16, the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 15(d) is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 15(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. ) is the same length as the time until the state shown in FIG.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 15(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 15(c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(a). are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 15(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. This change of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 15(e) displays the text "power saving mode". This display indicates that the power saving mode setting has been selected. It does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 15(e), and the non-demonstration state remains. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIG. 15(e) and FIG. 144R, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. In addition, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demonstration animation is played in a bright state without being darkened.

FIG. 17 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 17(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 13(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(a), after the entire display screen turns white, the corporate logo that gradually appears from the back is displayed in a completely appearing state. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. 17, similarly to FIG. 15, a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. Moreover, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. . Further, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 17(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 17(a) are illuminated in white. .

Also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be turned off. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, only the left side lamp 144L of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 6) may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may flash white, and the right side lamp 144R may light red.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 17A, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 17 as well as the example shown in FIG. 15, the amusement store clerk presses the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. to operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17B and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example as well as in the example shown in FIG. 15, the store clerk performs switch operation (1) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character appears, which was described with reference to FIG. 13(b). The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but on the contrary, the first volume selection icon SI1 overlaps part of the first guidance display icon GI1. May be displayed overlapping.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 17(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Also, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(c), the animation (demonstration animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which has been described with reference to FIG. 13(c), is displayed. The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the volume for the exhibition, which started to be displayed after the first guidance display icon GI1, overlaps the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state.

FIG. 18 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In this FIG. 18 as well, time elapses from left to right in the drawing, as in FIG. Also, the timing of (c) in FIG. 18 coincides with the timing of FIG. I am doing it. Further, FIG. 18 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, the left side Light emission modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

Also on the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 18, an animation (demo animation 3/5) in which a princess appears is displayed in a bright state on the effect image display device 157, and the characters "exhibition volume" are displayed. A state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above various light emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. It becomes the one shown at a shorter time interval than the one shown.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration effect is being executed, that is, the demonstration animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 17(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light-emitting means that have lit in white until now, the light-emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 17(c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. The icon SI2 is displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, when the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the power saving mode is set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 15, even if the user selects to set the power saving mode while the demonstration animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demonstration animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from scratch. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 18, at the timing of FIG. 17(d), while the demonstration animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is reproduced. is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. Also, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen that has become entirely white due to the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Also, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 17(f), the corporate logo appears quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the corporate logo is It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing of FIG. 17(f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI, which notifies that the power saving mode is set, "power saving mode being set" is started at the bottom of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 17(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 17(h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that disappeared once is displayed again. The re-displayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the foremost layer, and overlaps part of the second volume selection icon SI2 and also overlaps the power saving mode setting display AI. The first guidance display icon GI1 also has the same visibility as the first guidance display icon GI1 in FIG. 17(b), and the first guidance display icon GI1 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed in the foremost layer and partially overlap the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed in the foremost layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demonstration animation starts to darken to when it completely darkens on the effect image display device 157 (Fig. 17(g) to Fig. 17(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left It is longer than the time when the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are extinguished at the timing of FIG. 17(d). When the demonstration animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised. may be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even if the store clerk performs a switch operation to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. Display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166 lit in white is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 in the state where the power saving mode is set, the display returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demonstration animation ends, and the display of the demonstration animation ends. A payout table shown in 14(a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the non-power saving mode is restored and the demonstration animation is switched to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 15). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B is displayed.

Also, if the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non power saving mode. Toji's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 14(b) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 17(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 17(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 displays the first guidance display icon GI1. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. FIG. Also, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is there no prompt to press the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165 either. In spite of this, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. The player usually cannot know this setting value, but there are cases where a setting suggestion display is displayed as shown in FIG. 14(b). If only the Lord's character is displayed, it suggests an odd (settings 1, 3, 5) setting. If only the old man character is displayed, it suggests an even (settings 2, 4, 6) setting. If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6. When such setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state of FIGS. Alternatively, in the states of FIGS. 17(d) to 17(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the setting suggestion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. can be Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 19 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 19 is an example in which the door opening error is being notified. The following description will focus on differences from the example shown in FIG. 17 in which the error notification of the door open error is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 19, the store clerk opens the front door 102 before the demonstration animation starts. At this time, the store clerk opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece protruding when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door being opened", and the upper speaker 272 (not shown in FIG. 19) outputs a door opening error message such as "Door is open". is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 19A, the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, there is displayed an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

Also, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 19(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 19(a) are illuminated in white. .

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" is displayed. Also, at the lower left, the display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "Exhibition volume" is displayed. A first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk performs switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 19(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is still lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Also, the display of the demonstration animation is started from the beginning, and while the demonstration animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is also started to be reproduced. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 19(d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed so as to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The following description is omitted because it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 17, except for the mode of various light emitting means and the fact that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed.

In this example as well, during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the clerk operated the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to switch from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a). Also in this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the hopper empty error is still occurring.

A motor-driven medal discharge device 180 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket run out, and the medal payout sensor detects the lapse of a predetermined first time. The hopper empty error is reported when the motor is not turned on even when the motor is turned on, and when recovery processing for rotating the motor in the reverse direction fails to recover. If the hopper is empty error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with tokens, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted into the key hole 140 to the left. The error is cleared by turning to .

FIG. 20(a) is a diagram showing a state in which an empty hopper error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 20(a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display with diagonal hatching). That is, an error display EI2 such as "error occurred" that cannot identify the error that has occurred, and an error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error such as "replenish medals and press the reset switch". is displayed. It should be noted that an error display indicating an instruction to the player, such as "please call a clerk", may also be provided.

In addition, the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 20(a) has a built-in first effect lamp lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 20(a) are illuminated in white. .

The amusement store clerk opens the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece, and performs switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred", this error display EI2 is also used to inform the door opening error, and characters such as "Door being opened" shown in FIG. The error display EI of the door opening error by display is not displayed. In addition, an error notification sound for a door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It is also possible to output an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player, such as "Please replenish medals." Alternatively, an error display EI for a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound for a door opening error may be output.

When the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 such as "error occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed in the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" is also displayed, this error display is displayed. are also displayed overlapping each other. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to remove the hopper empty error may be displayed in the foremost layer.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed with characters of "meeting sound volume".

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190 to select the setting of the power saving mode, and the volume level is set to the seventh stage volume level. However, since the state shown in FIG. 20(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demonstration animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 20(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 displaying the characters "power saving mode" displays an error such as "error occurrence". It is displayed overlapping the display EI2.

Also, in FIG. 20(d), there is no change in the mode of various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In the above explanation, the power saving mode is not set unless the demonstration effect is being executed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is reproduced in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 6, power saving may also be performed in other devices. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be lowered, not limited to animation reproduction. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may be extinguished. Furthermore, instead of completely extinguishing the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the luminance (light amount) is lowered. Even in the dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Furthermore, the timing for starting power saving depends on the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (timing in FIG. 17(d)) and the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 17 ( Although the timing of g) is different from the timing of g), power saving is started first with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and then the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 are started. You may make it start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You may do so. In addition, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing of starting power saving may be varied.

In addition, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps cannot be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of each lamp can also be selected by the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the sound volume level. You may enable it to select by operation.

Next, operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

FIG. 21 shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168. FIG. The first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is capable of displaying luminescent display of seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) forming a rainbow. Luminescent display is also possible. This white luminous display becomes the default luminous display of the first chance button 165 . The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also capable of displaying luminous display of seven colors forming a rainbow like the first luminous display, and white light-emitting display is also available as a default light-emitting display. It is displayable. Note that the second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light (default light emission).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 21(a), the operation presentation has started. This operation effect is an effect started after the end of the game, and is an effect executed only during a period in which the game is not played. That is, the operation effect is an effect that is started when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. is started. In addition, the operation effect may be an effect that is continuously executed during the game (while the reels are rotating), an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started, or an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started. ) may be executed only.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 21(a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red), and the light emitting display of the third color is displayed. The production image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter (this animation is hereinafter referred to as the "large hall animation"). , a first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165 is displayed. The first operation prompting display HD1 here is composed of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. FIG. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the third color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165. FIG.

The start timing of the operation effect may be the timing when the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing when the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started. The timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started may be the same timing, but the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing may be faster. Since the timing at which the light emission display changes is earlier, the player's attention is drawn to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emission display functions as an advance notice of the first operation promotion display HD1. However, the timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed, the first chance button 165 is operated on the effect image display device 157 as shown on the right side of FIG. 21(a). An operation result display (response display) displayed in response to this is displayed. The operation result display will be described in detail later, but here, the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation by the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord. Here, the frame display RD21 is the first color (eg, yellow). . Further, the operated first chance button 165 continues to display the luminous display of the third color (for example, red). That is, the display mode does not change after the operation.

Also in the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 21(b), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red) as in FIG. A luminous display is displayed. As in FIG. 21(a), the effect image display device 157 has a first operation promotion display including a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. A suggestive operation result display RD20 including a (eg, yellow) frame display RD21 is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is turned off, and the light-emitting display of the third color (for example, red) is terminated.

Note that the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and even if the first chance button 165 is not operated within this predetermined period of time, the operation result display will be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is displayed whether or not the first chance button 165 is operated. You can start the next game after watching. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated within a predetermined time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Next, a characteristic operation presentation in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, which differ in the type of operation result display. One is the first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. The other is a second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display of suggestive display is displayed.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frames included in the operation result display. There are multiple patterns of display color combinations.

FIG. 22(a) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before operation displays a light-emitting display of a third color (for example, red) in the first operation effect. (b) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. The rainbow color may be a mode in which the display colors are changed one by one continuously to display each of the seven colors forming the rainbow, or the seven colors forming the rainbow may be displayed at once. A mode in which areas are separated and displayed may be used.

In the first operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165. However, even if the second chance button 166 is operated, the operation result is displayed. may be displayed. In other words, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may become operation valid buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). In addition, in the first operation presentation, there is also a state where the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying the light emission display of the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display that notifies the number of AT-added games. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the number of AT-added games, as shown in the respective tables of FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b). Also, after being operated, the first chance button 165 changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

If both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, even if the second chance button 166 instead of the first chance button 165 is operated, the first chance button 165 However, the second chance button 166 changes to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may be the same light emitting display as the light emitting display before the operation, or the first chance button 165 and the Similarly, the luminous display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 22(a)), the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. ) is displayed (the table shown in FIG. 22(b)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) , the operation result display is not displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. Note that the number of AT-added games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and the content of the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is determined based on the result of the lottery. It is also decided whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation enable button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in terms of control, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 itself may not be accepted for control purposes.

FIG. 22(c) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying a light-emitting display of a third color (for example, red) in the second operation effect. (d) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the second operation effect.

In the second operation effect as well, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165, but the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 Both may be operation enable buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

In the second operation effect as well, before the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation prompting display HD1, which is the same as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. 21(a). there is In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display of suggestive display (see FIG. 21). be. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 22(c) and 22(d). Also, in the second operation effect, the first chance button 165 after being operated changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect, when both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a luminous display in the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may have the same luminous display as the luminous display before the operation. However, like the first chance button 165, it may change to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Also, even if the first chance button 165 before operation displays a third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 22(c)), a fourth color (for example, rainbow) is displayed (table shown in FIG. 22(d)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is the fourth color (for example, rainbow). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed, and unless the first chance button 165 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed. It should be noted that the result of the expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display (details will be described later, whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by a lottery before the second operation effect is started, and the lottery result. In response, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display is determined, and it is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation valid button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted as a control, but the operation result of the suggestive display is displayed. It may not be displayed, or may not accept the operation of second chance button 166 itself for control.

It should be noted that in both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is the first color, the second color, the fifth color, or other colors. The color of the frame display and the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 after the operation may be other colors.

Also, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may occur at the same time. In this case, both the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display for suggestive display are displayed. It becomes the same color as the frame display color. It should be noted that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display for notifying the number of additional games.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 23, the luminous display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in the vertical line on the left side.

The vertical line on the left side shows the light-emitting display state of the first chance button 165 .

The vertical line in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. For example, +25G displayed in the AT added game number display RD12 indicates that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the AT added game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of games added to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained. Note that the color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game feature of accumulating points, the color of the frame display RD11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical line on the right shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. What is implied here is the level of expectation (reliability) that a player is given a privilege (AT state in this example). When the character display RD22 of the lord inside the frame display RD21 is displayed, an effect for predicting whether or not the above privilege will be granted (in this example, if you win, the above privilege will be granted) The start of the battle effect) is confirmed, and the color of the frame display RD21 indicates the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the battle effect) to transition to the state in which the above privilege is granted. ). In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display also corresponds to the display regarding the player's privilege. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is also a notice display of the start of an effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be given or not, or a notice display of the start of the effect in the next game. Furthermore, it corresponds to a notice display that a privilege will be given to the player, or a notice display that the player will win the battle effect. Note that the privilege given to the player may be a big bonus or the like in addition to the AT state. Also, instead of the lord character display RD22, a princess character display or an old man character display may be displayed. In the case of displaying a princess character, there is a 50% chance that the effect will be started to predict whether or not the privilege will be granted, and the color of the frame display RD21 will also correspond to that probability (for example, , the first color), and in the case of the character display of the old man, the probability of starting the effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be granted is 0%, and the color of the frame display RD21 is 0%. may also be colored according to its probability (for example, a fifth color).

In FIGS. 21 to 29, the state in which the first chance button 165 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Also, in FIGS. 21 to 29, the fifth color (for example, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the default luminescent display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 25 games added. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the fifth color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state is 0%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of the transition to the AT state is 0%. Corresponds to a color that suggests absolutely no migration.

In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 29, the first color (eg, yellow) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the first light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 50 games. do. The first color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 25%, or that the degree of reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 25%.

In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 29, the second color (eg, blue) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the second light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 100 games added. do. The second color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 50%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 50%.

Also, in FIGS. 21 to 29, the third color (eg, red) is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This third color corresponds to the third light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 300 games added. do. The third color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 75%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 75%.

Also, in FIGS. 21-29, the fourth color (eg, rainbow color) is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the fourth light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 500 games added. do. The fourth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 100%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 100%. Corresponds to colors suggesting migration.

In addition, in the explanation here, it was explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that the privilege is given to the player differs according to the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, The third color, the fourth color, and so on, in order of description, may suggest that the player's degree of advantage increases, or that the degree of expectation (reliability) of various notices increases.

FIG. 24 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation presentation 1 described with reference to FIG. 22(a). 24 also shows the effect image display device 157, the first chance button 165, the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168, as in FIG. 21 (FIGS. 25 to 29). the same).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 21, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation. The light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 24(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +50G is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. A color (eg, red) is changing to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 24(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +100G is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. It is changing from a color (eg red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 24(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a fourth color. It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous examples. do not do.

As described above, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after being operated is the luminous display related to the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165. In some cases, it is possible to obtain information according to the operation. In addition, in the effect image display device 157, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time. The effect represented by the luminous display of the 1-chance button 165 may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165 are related displays, cohesive effects are developed, and in this respect also, the player can enjoy the effects. easier to understand.

FIG. 25 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 22(b).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 consists of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 25(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +25G is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 25(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +300G is displayed in the third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 25(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. remains displayed in the color of Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed unlike the previous example.

FIG. 26 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 1 described with reference to FIG. 22(c).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 24, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 26(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 26(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 26(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a third color (eg red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not do.

FIG. 27 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 22(d).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 25, the first operation prompting display HD1 here includes a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying the light-emitting display of the fourth color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 27(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, rainbow colors) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 27(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in a fourth color. color (eg, rainbow colors) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 27(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in four colors. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

Furthermore, another example of operation effects will be described.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of operation presentation.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 28(a) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light of the third color as shown on the right side of FIG. The display has changed to a luminous display of a first color (eg, yellow). In addition, in the central portion of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. This operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the +100 G AT added game number display RD12 is different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. different and displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display displayed at the lower right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far, and is displayed in a reduced size. It is displayed in the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the chance button 165 . In other words, although the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the reduced suggestive display, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is The suggestive display operation result display RD20 is given priority over the suggestive display operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the suggestive display operation result display RD20. As described above, although the priority of the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are different, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, when the next game is started, the battle effect is started, and the right to shift to the AT state is stocked by winning the battle effect. That is, even if 100 games are added and the conditions for ending the AT state are satisfied, the stocked right shifts to the AT state again. It should be noted that the battle effect is not started when the next game is started, but when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (for example, when the added 100 games are completed), the battle effect is started and the battle is started. There may be a case where the player wins the performance and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the color of the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display, and also the light-emitting display of the first color and the light-emitting display of the first color. It is also possible to alternately display light emitting displays of two colors. Alternatively, half of the light emitting area may be displayed in the first color and the other half in the second color. Furthermore, the area of the light emitting region may be made larger for the priority color. For example, a first color may be displayed in a 3/4 luminous area and a second color may be displayed in a 1/4 luminous area.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 28B is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 28(b), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, but does not display an operation result display RD20 for suggestive display. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 28(b), the color of the frame display RD11 is the second color (for example, blue), unlike the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. As a result, the frame display RD21 is displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, can display the frame display RD21 in the first color. It can be guessed that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestive display is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 28C is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 28(c), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display, but does not display the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 28(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the second color (for example, blue), unlike the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. The display of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games displayed in color is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is not displayed can display the frame display RD11 in the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of displayed AT-additional games is not displayed, and the interest in the game may be improved. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example in which an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 29(a) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over, and the first chance button 165 is displayed with a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110-112 start rotating. The large hall animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. (response display) kind of display is not displayed. It should be noted that there are cases where another animation (for example, an animation dedicated to the game) is displayed instead of the large hall animation when the game is started. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed to the light-emitting display of the fifth color, that is, the default light-emitting display. Note that the first chance button 165 may be turned off. If the player wants to proceed with the game without looking at the light emitting display or the operation result displays RD10 and RD20 as shown in the example shown in FIG. 24 or the example shown in FIG. be.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 29(b) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. On the other hand, second chance button 166 is in the off state. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

Even if the second chance button 166 in the off state is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. , the luminous display of the first chance button 165 that has not been operated changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains unlit. Further, on the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed as an operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the second chance button 166 being operated. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 29(b), the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color (eg, yellow) as the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, the second chance button 166 was operated without operating the first chance button 165, but the result is the same as the example (example shown in FIG. 26A) when the first chance button 165 is operated. It has become. If the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. The result may be the same as the example shown in FIG.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 29(c) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the end of the game. In this state, the first chance button 165 displays a second color (for example, blue) light-emitting display. It is On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a fifth color (for example, white) light-emitting display. The first chance button 165 may also display a default fifth color (for example, white), or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth A color (eg, green) light emitting display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be turned off. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a second operation prompting display HD2 prompting the user to operate the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. The second operation prompting display HD2 here is composed of a character display LD2 indicating that the second chance button 166 should be pressed, and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying the light emitting display of the fifth color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166.例文帳に追加Before the second operation prompting display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green) to announce that the second operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation prompting display HD2 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166 as shown on the right side of FIG. 29(c). , an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 29(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after being operated also displays a light-emitting display of the same first color as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated means of operation indicates that the operated means of operation has been operated. A light-emitting display in a color common to the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 continues to display the light-emitting display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the light-emitting display color (first color) of the second chance button 166 after the operation. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 29B, even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the operation result display is displayed. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 for informing the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestive display are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display light emission in the first color.

Further, after the operation, the second chance button 166 may remain illuminated in the fifth color, may be extinguished, or may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue). For example, the light-emitting display may change to another color.

Furthermore, in the case where the second chance button 166 is configured to perform only the fifth color light emission display, the second chance button 166 may remain in the fifth color light emission display after being operated. , may be turned off.

Note that both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157 before the display of the operation prompting display such as the first operation prompting display HD1 and the second operation prompting display HD2. In some cases, it may be announced that either one of the first-operation prompting display HD1 and the second-operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

In addition, the color of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 changes in both the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 that is a suggestive display. may change, the color of the kimono of the lord's character may change, or the color of the character display and the color of the dialogue may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color with the largest display area may change to the light-emitting display color of the operation means after the operation.

Furthermore, in the present specification, the common color does not have to be completely the same, and there may be a difference in shade, and there may be a difference due to different types of devices such as liquid crystal display devices and LEDs. good too. If the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, and red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effects on the operating means after the operation may be display effects related to the operation result displays RD10 and RD20, or may be display effects matching the colors of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20. It may be a display effect that makes the result display RD10, RD20 image.

Furthermore, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to a state in which a big bonus is awarded, or an operation that notifies the number of AT-added games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the AT state is awarded, and the operation result display suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the big bonus is awarded. good.

In summary, the display effects (e.g., light-emitting display) performed by the operation means (e.g., the first chance button 165) after the operation means are displayed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during presentation display (for example, operation response display). For example, the color displayed by the display effect performed by the operation means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Further, the display effects (eg, light emitting display) performed by the operating means after the operating means (eg, first chance button 165) is operated are the first display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color) and the second display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color). It is selected from among a plurality of display effects including a display effect (e.g., light emitting display of a second color), and the first display effect is a first effect display A (e.g., , 50 game addition) may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD10), and the second display effect (for example, a light emitting display in a second color) may be displayed by display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 ) during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 100 games are added). For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 50 games are added), and the color displayed in the second display effect is It is displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying that 100 games are added).

Alternatively, the first display effect (for example, light-emitting display of the first color) is the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of 25%) on the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ), and the second display effect (e.g., light-emitting display of a second color) is the second effect display B (e.g., expectation It may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50%. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%), and the color displayed in the second display effect is , is displayed during the display of the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 50%).

Furthermore, the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by operating means (e.g., first chance button 165) is changed to the first display effect (e.g., first color display) after operating the operating means. luminous display), and the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by the operating means changes to a second display effect (e.g., a luminous display of a second color) after the operation of the operating means luminous display).

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the description so far, the selection of the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190 described above, the selection of setting to the power saving mode, and the operation It is also applicable to pachinko machines to devise the luminous display after the operation of the means and to associate the luminous display after the operation of the operating means with the mode of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20.

FIG. 30 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

The pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P, which has an upwardly opening opening at the upper part of the rear surface, for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a tubular member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main control board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing, and control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the main control section. A first sub-board case 162P that houses the first sub-control board 160P that constitutes the first sub-control unit that performs A second sub-board case 165P that houses a second sub-control board 164P that constitutes a game ball, a payout control unit that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses the payout control board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses a launch control board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply that supplies power to various electrical game machines. A power supply control board 182P comprising a power switch 178P that constitutes a control unit and turns on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on is housed. and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can perform RWM clear (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 180P, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while being operated, gives a predetermined notification (for example, a character display or sound saying "Please press again to clear the RAM", or a character display). and sound), and if the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

A first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A, is arranged on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a store clerk, etc.) However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is arranged on the lower left side of the rear surface, and the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the upper left side of the rear surface. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. A second effect button that replaces 166 is arranged.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The display means displays a first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 24(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By looking at the first operation means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information corresponding to the operation. In addition, the display means may display various images at the same time or use various display colors at the same time. The effect represented by the light emission display may be easier for the player to understand. Further, since the first light-emitting display and the first operation result display are related displays, a coherent presentation is developed, which also makes it easier for the player to understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be. Further, the first operation means may execute a display effect instead of the light emission display. For example, an effect in which a certain pattern is displayed may be executed.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first operation result display may be a display relating to the grant amount of the privilege granted to the player, may be a display relating to the granting period of the privilege granted to the player, or may be a display relating to the period during which the privilege is granted to the player. It may be a display related to the granting time of the privilege granted to the person.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the player's hand does not cover the first operation means, the first light-emitting display can be easily seen. Further, the first light emitting display is performed by operating the second operation means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

The second operating means may be capable of displaying light-emitting display. For example, the second operation means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). It can be.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the game can be played without looking at the first light-emitting display.

It should be noted that the third operation means may be operated to advance the game (for example, start the game).

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can confirm the first light-emitting display even when the power saving mode is set.

The power consumption of the first operating means may be reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting. That is, the first setting may be the power saving mode, and the second setting may be the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operating means may shift to a first state corresponding to the first setting when the first setting is set. The first state may be a turned off state. That is, it may be in a state in which light emission display is not performed.

The display means displays a second display related to the second operation means [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1 ] can be displayed [for example, FIG. 17(h)], the second display is displayed on the display means with the first setting set, It may be characterized in that when an operation is performed, a display in response to the operation (for example, display of a payout table shown in FIG. 14(a)) is displayed on the display means.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 24(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The amusement machine is a slot machine, and includes a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) each of which stops rotating when a stop operation is performed, and the display means displays the first operation prompting display. can be displayed after a reel that has been rotating the slowest among the plurality of reels is stopped (for example, a third stop operation).

again,
"The first luminescent display has a main luminescent color that is the same color as the display color in the first mode [eg, the mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [eg, the first is the color (yellow) of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a second mode [for example, a mode where the frame display RD11 is in a second color (blue)]. A first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays the first mode [for example, the mode where the frame display RD21 is in the first color (yellow)]. A second operation result display [for example, a suggestive display operation result display RD20] may be displayed,
The first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light emitting display is related to the second operation result display of the first aspect rather than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect including a color closer to the display color in the first aspect than
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to suggest an operation result display by the luminous display (the first luminous display) of the first operating means after the operation. That is, if the first light-emitting display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means will be displayed in the first mode. . In addition, since the first light emitting display and the second operation result display of the first mode are associated displays, a coherent presentation is developed and the player can easily understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Further, the first light-emitting display may be a light-emitting display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display, and the second light-emitting display is the second aspect. It may be a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display suggesting the player's degree of expectation that a privilege will be awarded. Alternatively, it may be a display of advance notice that a privilege will be given to the player. In the case where it is regarded as the display of the notice in this way, it may be a display showing the reliability of the notice.

again,
"The display means displays both the first operation result display and the second operation result display when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, the state shown on the right],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the operation result display with the high priority by looking at the first operation means.

The first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is being performed. Alternatively, the first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may always be displayed in the state where the display is on.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means, and the third light-emitting display A light emitting display different from the one light emitting display and the second light emitting display may be used. The third light-emitting display may be, for example, a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display and also a light-emitting display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third light emission display may be a display of alternate light emission of a color common to the display color in the second aspect and a color common to the display color in the first aspect. However, even if it is a display in which a part of the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

again,
"The first operation means is such that the display means is the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emission display may be displayed while only the second operation result display is displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 26(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, the first operation means is such that the display means is the second mode of the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emitting display may not be displayed while only the first operation result display is being displayed.

again,
"Both of the operation result displays displayed on the display means are displays in which the second operation result display is displayed smaller than the first operation result display."
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even if it is difficult for the player to see the high-priority display (the second operation result display) on the display means, the player can see the high-priority operation result display by looking at the first operation means. can be recognized.

again,
"The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. indicated state],
The first light emitting display is the first operation result display [for example, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games] in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)]. RD10], which is a light-emitting display related to [e.g., a light-emitting display containing a color common to the display color in the first aspect];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The display color in the first aspect of the first operation result display and the display color in the first aspect of the second operation result display are a common first color [e.g., yellow],
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display in which a main emission color is the first color,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [eg, AT state],
The second operation result display is a display of advance notice that a certain effect [for example, a battle effect that shifts to AT state when winning] will start.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. " to "F"], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, extinguished state or dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 24(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The first operating means may display a third light-emitting display during display of the first operation prompting display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 24(a)],
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation prompting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a first color [e.g., yellow],
The second luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a second color [e.g., blue],
The third luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a third color [e.g., red].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It would be uninteresting if the state after operation of the operating means is either to continue the light emission display before operation or to turn off the light, but according to this game machine, you can expect a change in color after operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a first color; the second light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a second color; The third luminescent display may be a display in which the main luminescent color is the third color.

Moreover, the display including the emission color of the first color may be the display not including the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display including the emission color of the first color most often or the first color It is acceptable if the color of is most conspicuous.

The display including the emission color of the second color may be a display that does not include the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first emission color and the third emission color is included, a display that includes the second emission color most often or the second emission color is included. Any display in which the luminescent color of the color of .

The display including the third luminescent color may be a display that does not include the first luminescent color and the second luminescent color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission colors of the first color and the second color is included, the display including the emission color of the third color most often or the third emission color is used. Any display in which the luminescent color of is most conspicuous may be used.

Further, the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display.

again,
"The display means is capable of displaying a first suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation that a privilege [for example, AT state] will be granted to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a second suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
The display means is capable of displaying a third suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
the first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the frame display RD21 is the operation result display RD20 in which the first color (yellow) is displayed];
the second suggestive display is a display including the second color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the second color (blue)];
the third suggestive display is a display including the third color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is a third color (red)];
The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestive display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the first indication of suggestion is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third indication of suggestion [for example, 75%],
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the degree of expectation by the color of the light-emitting display after operating the first operating means.

The first suggestive display corresponds to the first aspect of the second operation result display, the second suggestive display corresponds to the second aspect of the second operation result display, The third suggestion display may correspond to a third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, the first suggestive display is a display in which the first color is the most conspicuous among the included colors, and the second suggestive display is a display in which the second color is the most conspicuous among the included colors. The most prominent display, and the third suggestive display may be the display in which the third color is the most prominent among the included colors. The first suggestive display is a display that matches the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that matches the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that matches the second color. It may be displayed in three colors. The first suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color. It may be a display that gives an image of three colors.

again,
"The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion,
The degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color, and the second color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color. It may be a suggestive color.

By performing light emitting display with low expectation after operating the first operation means (by changing from the third light emitting display to the first light emitting display or the second light emitting display), the player is kept calm. may be able to

again,
"When the first operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 24(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display has a second mode and a third mode in addition to the first mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)],
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)],
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is a third color (red)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the aspect including the first color may be an aspect that does not include the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the first color is included most or the first color is the most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

The mode including the second color may be a case in which the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one color of the first color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the second color is included the most or the second color is the most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

The mode including the third color may be a case in which the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is included, a mode in which the third color is included most or the third color is most conspicuous Any mode is acceptable.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(b)],
The first operating means may display the second light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Even if the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed, good.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed [for example, FIG. )],
The first operation means does not display the second light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the second light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 24(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first device [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740];
a second device [for example, effect image display device 157];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game table comprising
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [eg, extinguished state or dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device enters a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state. ],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, after the first device transitions to the first state [for example, FIG. 17(d)], the second device may shift to the second state [for example, FIGS. 17(g) to 17(h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, due to the time lag, it may be possible to check the first state of the first device and then check the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operating means, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state." ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless the state is the certain state [for example, the demo state] even if the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
the first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"the number of first devices [e.g., six] is greater than the number of second devices [e.g., one];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first device, which has a large number, and reduce power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first device in the first state is less than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first device is higher than that of the second device.

Power consumption in the first device during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the second device during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the first device, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] for controlling the first device;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said second device;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
the second device receives the first signal via the second control means;
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
“The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. longer than the time it takes for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 17(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first rendering means [e.g., first light emitting means, first display means],
The second device is a second effect means [e.g., second light emitting means, second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. may,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 21],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

note that,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect setting is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and thereafter the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A playground characterized by
was also explained.

again,
"The operation means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed more than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by:
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of said first notification means is greater than the number of said second notification means."
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of said first notification means during notification of a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of said second notification means during notification of said certain notification."
was also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that said operating means are means that cannot be operated by a player."
was also explained.

again,
" A first control means and a second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. and the second notification means receives a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. A playground that features."
also explained.

again,
"The time taken from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A playground characterized by a long."
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to an operation;
A game table comprising
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction unit 190b is set to "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [e.g., demo animation] from the beginning [e.g., FIG. 17(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 17] and the first setting is selected, the display means displays the first animation." is to restart the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demonstration animation. The demo animation is an animation that is started to be displayed on the display means after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation is started when the player does not perform any operation while the second animation (non-demonstration animation) is being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that will be played.

again,
``The display means is configured so that the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 15] while the second animation [for example, the non-demonstration animation shown in FIG. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 16],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 15] and the first setting is selected during display of the second animation, the display means to continue displaying the animation [for example, FIG. 15(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected during the display of the first animation, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. display in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the setting [for example, FIGS. 17(g) to 17(h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Producing means [for example, the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state]. may migrate,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to the second state after the production means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 17(d)]. state [for example, FIG. 17(g) to FIG. 17(h)]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the effect means may be a light emitting means. Also, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes the effect corresponding to the first setting. Also, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the rendering means is not in a state where the first animation is displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. does not transition to
Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operation means, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is being displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. which does not migrate,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
wherein the effect means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the production means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the production means having a large number, thereby suppressing the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the rendering means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the power saving effect is higher with the presentation means than with the first display means.

Power consumption of the effect means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption of the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting to the first state for the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the effect means,
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without passing through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 17(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 21],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. is [for example, FIG. 17(d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. [e.g., remains lit white in FIG. 17(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponding to the first setting will be changed and that the state will not be changed. It may become easier.

again,
"First operation means [eg, first chance button 165],
a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166];
with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. When combined with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Also, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not transition to a state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. The player can be made to recognize that it is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load on the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means is capable of displaying a second display [for example, a first guide display icon GI1] related to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, The payout table shown in FIG. 14(a)] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The second display may be an operation-promoting display that prompts the operation of the second operating means, or may be an operation-promoting display that suggests the operation of the second operating means. , the second operation means may be displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the first operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, , setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 14(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demonstration state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) shifted from the demonstration state. That is, when the first operation means is operated, the demo state is changed to the non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operation means is operated instead of the second operation means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. It can be.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether or not the second display is displayed], the display means In response to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 14(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The response display to the operation of the first operation means performed with the second display hidden may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. good too.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated while the first setting is set, the response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, 17(d)], the state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo A state in which animation is played back in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 17(g) to FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light-emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. is non-migratory and
The display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the certain state [for example, demonstration state] is selected even if the first setting is selected by operating the operation means for selection. is
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

A certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means is reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting, and
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of said first light emitting means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of said display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first light emitting means, which are numerous in number, and to suppress the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is less than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first light emitting means is higher than that of the display means.

Power consumption in the first light emitting means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially shifting the first light emitting means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the first light emitting means;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 17(g) to 17(h)] is is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 17(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 21],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "second .." may be replaced with "first ..".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are only the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. is not. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 82. FIG.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games ending without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 32, the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are displayed on the upper stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the gap. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 32 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines become valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. , the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) is internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state or special combination 2 internal winning state) or a special game state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 33) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 33) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. It should be noted that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of first updating means, state setting means, advantage setting means, storage means, and privilege lottery means. Also, the first sub-controller 400 corresponds to an example of a second update means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, and a display of the accumulated number of coins). A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 4 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell 1 pattern", and the frame numbered 6 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 pattern” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning hands of the slot machine 100 include special hands 1-2, replay hands 1-3, and small hands 1-7. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as BB1 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning. be. In this embodiment, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state. This special combination 1 is a combination that is won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state, which will be described later (see remarks column in FIG. 35).

The special combination 2 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a BB2 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning a prize. In this embodiment, only two medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state. This special combination 2 is a combination that is won only when two medals are inserted in the normal game state (see remarks column in FIG. 35).

Further, replay combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 to 2 and replay roles 1 to 3 may be called "operating roles". In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. 2. Winning of replay hands 1 to 3 is included. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning, and other roles are not carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning. is a role.

For the special roles 1 and 2, medals are not paid out due to winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "bell 2-watermelon-replay 2" for special role 1 and "bell 2-seven 1-replay 2" for special role 2. In the following explanation, special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" and special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and special roles 1 and 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special combination 1-2 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each of the internally won special combinations is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 1 internal winning state. When the flag corresponding to the special combination 2 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 2 internal winning state. These flags are maintained in the on state until the corresponding working combination is won, and in the next and subsequent games, it becomes easy to win these working combinations. Specifically, even if the special roles 1 and 2 are not won in the game in which the special roles 1 and 2 are internally won, the same state as the special role 1 and 2 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combination is performed. It will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

Special role 1 internally elected state and special role 2 internally elected state will be described later in detail. The stop control of the reels is executed so that the symbols constituting the are aligned preferentially.

The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combinations are that replay 1 is "replay 1/2-replay 1/2-replay 1/2", replay 2 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", and replay The role 3 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2". Among the above replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay", the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "seven 1 matching replay", and the replay hand 3 may be referred to as "seven 2 matching replay". In addition, when the replay combination 2 is won in the AT state described later, the state shifts to the pseudo BB1 state described later, and when the replay combination 3 is won in the AT state, the state shifts to the pseudo BB2 state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 35). ). The symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is the pseudo BB1 transition symbol, and the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is the pseudo BB2 transition symbol. The pseudo BB1 state continues for 50 games, while the pseudo BB2 state lasts only 20 games.

The replay hands 1 to 3 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 8 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR-Watermelon-Replay 1" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Cherry-Replay 1" for the small combination 2, and "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" for the small combination 3. There, the small winning combination 4 is "BAR-Replay 1/2-Replay 1/2", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell 2-Bell 1-Bell 1", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/ 2-Bell 1/2", small win 7 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/2-Replay 1/2", and small win 8 is "Bell 1-Replay 1/2-Bell 1/2" be. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "weak cherry", the small role 3 is "strong cherry", the small role 4 is "chance eye", the small role 5 is "common bell", The small winning combination 6 may be referred to as "push order bell", and the small winning combination 7 and small winning combination 8 may be referred to as "one bell". A strong cherry is more likely to obtain a privilege than a weak cherry, and a role that is easier to obtain a privilege at the second chance. Further, the pressing order bell is a combination that, when internally won, does not win unless the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and is a combination that always wins regardless of the operation timing as long as the order of operation is correct. A single bell is a win when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the wrong order.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with the types of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 36 shows 12 types of condition devices (condition device numbers 1 to 12) that combine the roles explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this conditional device. These conditional devices are determined by lottery at the time of the game start operation. At this time, the combination corresponding to the condition device is called an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the time of the game start operation. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as internal winning of a role.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 is a gaming machine that tends to have the longest playing period in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2). FIG. 36 shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device constituted by a replay combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, the replay combination includes the replay combination 1 to the replay combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 state schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 can be stopped. , and if a pseudo BB2 state schedule flag, which will be described later, is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 can be stopped. If none of these pseudo BB state schedule flags are set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 can be stopped.

Condition device numbers 2 to 12 are internal winning hands composed of small hands. Among them, the conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won by overlapping with the small winning combination 6, the small winning combination 7, and the small winning combination 8, and six kinds of A to F are prepared. The combination of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is six patterns: "left-right center", "left-center right", "right-left center", "right-center left", "center-left-right", and "center-right-left". The six patterns A to F correspond to each of these six patterns as the correct operation order. That is, the correct answers for the pressing order are different for the condition device numbers 7 to 12. When conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally elected, if the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped (payout of 15 cards). On the other hand, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in an operation order different from the correct operation order (incorrect operation order), the symbol combination of the small winning combination 7 or the small winning combination 8 is stopped (one payment).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 36, the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 is the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each set value, but in the special winning 2 internal winning state (RT2), only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 5 of the condition device 6 is different. In other game states (for example, normal state, special game state, etc.), the higher the set value of the internal winning probability, the higher the player's advantage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 7 to 12 are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

As described above, in the state where the special combination 2 is internally elected, if a combination other than the special combination 2 is internally won, the reels are stopped and controlled so that the symbols constituting the other combination are preferentially arranged. is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the special role 2 internal winning state to the BB2 operating state which is a special game state, it is necessary to insert two medals, internally win without losing, and then win the special role 2.例文帳に追加

<Types of game state>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 and changes in the game states will be described. FIG. 37(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, as shown in FIG. 37(a), the game states include a normal game state, a special combination 1 internal winning state, a special combination 2 internal winning state, a BB1 operating state, and a BB2 operating state. It is configured so that five game states with different degrees of advantage for the player can be switched, and the degree of advantage is changed by switching between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, five states RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as states having different types and probabilities of internally winning replay combinations. and RT have a one-to-one relationship. That is, RT0 in the normal game state, RT1 in the state of winning the special prize 1, RT2 in the state of winning the special prize 2, RT3 in the state of BB1 operation, and RT4 in the state of BB2 operation. The game state is controlled by the main control section 300 . It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are more likely to be internally elected as a replay combination than RT0. Further, RT1 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT3, and RT2 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT4. Further, the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT3 and RT4 may be the same or different. may

In the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay combination is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

The special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state and special combination 2 internal winning state) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON. In this game state, it is easy to shift to the special game state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state), which is more advantageous than the normal game state. However, as described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if a role other than the special role 2 is internally won, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , the reel stop control is executed, so that the BB2 operating state cannot be entered.

The special game state (BB1 operation state and BB2 operation state) is an advantageous game state in which it is easier to win a small role than in the normal game state and the special role internal winning state, and it is easy to obtain medals. However, as described above, only 48 medals are given in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are given in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 37(a) shows the above-described game states, and symbols (A) to (F) attached to arrows are transition conditions between game states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal game state (RT0) to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) indicated by the arrow (A) is performed by internally winning the special combination 1, and the normal game state indicated by the arrow (D). The transition from (RT0) to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special combination 2. In the normal game state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special combination 1, and the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is considerably high, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 100 is a gaming machine where the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) tends to be the longest. The transition from the special role 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 active state (RT3) indicated by the arrow (B) is performed by winning the special role 1. As described above, in order to win the special role 1, it is necessary to perform a 3-coin bet. The transition from the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 active state (RT4) indicated by the arrow (E) is performed by winning the special combination 2. As described above, in order to win the special role 2, it is necessary to win the special role 2 after performing a two-coin bet and winning an internal win. The transition from the BB1 active state (RT3) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (C) is performed by paying out 48 medals as the specified number. Also, the transition from the BB2 active state (RT4) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (F) is performed by paying out two medals as the prescribed number.

<Types of production state>
Next, the types of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 and the transition of the effect state will be described. As described above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 is a gaming machine in which the period during which the game is played in the internal winning state of the special combination 2 tends to be the longest. It should be noted that the transition of the presentation state in other game states is the same as the transition described here. FIG. 37(b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the state where the special combination 2 is internally elected in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the production states are the initial state, the point specialization A state, the normal state, the point specialization B state, the sign state, the confrontation state, AT (assist It is configured to be able to switch between a total of eight performance states, namely, the time) state and the pseudo BB state. In this embodiment, the initial state goes through the normal state to the confrontation state, and if the AT lottery is won in this confrontation state, the state returns to the initial state via the AT state, and if the AT lottery is not won, the confrontation state occurs. It adopts a configuration that repeats a series of loops from the initial state to the initial state. Hereinafter, a period from starting from the initial state to returning to the initial state may be expressed as a cycle. In addition, in this embodiment, items that make it easier to transition to the AT state ("Defeat 1 body" item, "Defeat rate UP" item, which will be described later) are provided, and the accumulated points earned in the game during the lap (hereinafter referred to as the accumulated point ), this item can be acquired according to the configuration. Information on these cumulative points and items is stored in the RAM 308 . Each effect state will be described below based on the above description.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a round). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle). In this initial state, the confrontation mode (described later) and the number of games to transition to the precursor state are set (FIG. 44). That is, in this initial state, it can be said that the scheduling for the premonitory state and the confrontation state is executed at the start of the cycle. Only one game is set in this initial state, and the state immediately shifts to the point specialization A state.

The point specialization A state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. Points may be obtained in this production state. In the normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for the acquired item is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of accumulated points, and an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect). . In addition, in this normal state, the state shifts to the premonitory state according to the schedule set in the initial state, but apart from that, the state may shift to the point specialization B state by lottery.

The point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state.

There are two types of precursory states: a true precursory state and a false precursory state. The difference is that the true portent state shifts to the confrontation state after the set number of games has passed, while the false portent state returns to the normal state after the set number of games has passed. That is, it can be said that the false portent state is a presentation state provided to increase the expectation of transition to the confrontation state. You may be able to earn points even in this premonitory state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the state has shifted to the confrontation state is executed in the first game, and further, a confrontation effect (up to three games) between the main character and the enemy character is executed. Here, in the first game in the confrontation state, an item may be acquired in exchange for the remaining accumulated points, and an effect (item acquisition effect) indicating this may be executed. Further, when the player has the "destruction rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) for using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game. In addition, when there is no "killing rate UP" item in the first game, the confrontation effect is started from the second game (item use effect is not executed). When the result of the confrontation presentation is a total victory, the state shifts to the AT state, and when the main character loses in the confrontation presentation, the state shifts to the initial state. Incidentally, when shifting to the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is set.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate combination of minor combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. Therefore, the player can obtain more profits. This AT state shifts to the initial state when the set AT remaining game number becomes 0, but this AT remaining game number may be added. In addition, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable a shift to the pseudo BB state, and when the lottery is won, an effect is executed to urge the player to stop the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3, which is a pseudo BB symbol. Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 stops, the game shifts to a pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate wins of minor wins 6 to 8) are internally won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. becomes. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed.

FIG. 37(b) shows the production states described above, and the symbols (a) to (l) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the production states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the production state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" are aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing is executed. Details of this state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308 are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage in the slot machine 100 (for example, six kinds of advantages from 1 to 6), and can be operated when the front door 102 is opened. If this switch is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. In this initialization, for example, item information and accumulated point values are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the voltage is temporarily cut below the operating voltage (see step S221 in FIG. 39). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back processing, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when the power is cut off, and the stack Reset the pointer (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and effect state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data of the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main controller initial setting process of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. The data cleared here includes item information and accumulated point values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 39), and the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary set value is set as the display set value. By the processing here, the temporary set value is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113. In this embodiment, the bet button is used as the setting switch, but the operating means related to the game may be used as in this configuration, or the setting switch may be provided separately.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In the present embodiment, the temporary set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch is operated, and the temporary set value is set to 1 when the setting switch is operated while the temporary set value is 6. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is closed and the setting key switch is off (the setting key switch is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 39) is executed. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Next, details of various lottery processes (step S105) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, the internal lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state and RT, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. to determine an internal winning combination. For example, in the RT2 state in which the special combination 2 is internally elected, the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 36 is read. As a result of the internal lottery, when any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on.

In step S1203, item addition processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1205, confrontation setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1207, point specialization B state transition lottery processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1209, AT-related processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S1211, preparation for transmission of an internal winning command (sent at step S211 in FIG. 39) is executed, and various lottery processes are terminated. The internal winning command includes the internal winning hand, the current rendering state (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining games in the state and the number of remaining AT games), the result of the confrontation, Information that can specify the results of the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state or pseudo BB state, the correct operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct for the internal winning command of the internal winning combination including the small combination 6 (condition devices 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 36). It also includes operation instruction information representing the operation order of .

Next, details of the item addition process (step S1203) in various lottery processes in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1303; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1000 or more. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1305; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1305, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. In this embodiment, either the "defeat one" item or the "defeat rate UP" item is selected. Here, the "destroy one" item is an item that ensures that one win will be achieved in the confrontation state, and the "defeat rate UP" item is an item that increases the probability of winning in the confrontation state. There are 5 types of "destruction rate UP" items in order from the lowest defeat rate: "destruction rate? UP", "destruction rate small UP", "destruction rate UP medium", "destruction rate large UP", and "destruction rate super UP". is provided.

43(b) and 43(c) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1305. First, the item lottery table A shown in FIG. 43(b) is used to select either the "kill one" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 25%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 75%. If the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "defeat rate UP" item is selected using the "defeat rate UP" lottery table A in FIG. 43(c). In this table, if you don't have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item you get here is the first item), there is a 75% chance that the "medium defeat rate UP" item will be selected, and 24% , and 1% chance to select the item "Great Destruction Rate UP". On the other hand, if you have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item obtained here is the second or later), there is a 70% chance that the "destruction rate small UP" item will be selected, and 25% , a 4% chance to select a ``Major kill rate UP'' item, and a 1% chance to select a ``Super kill rate UP'' item.

In step S1307, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points, and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1301, which is executed first, in step S1311, which is followed when the presentation state is not the normal state, it is determined whether or not it is the first game in the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1315; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1315, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. FIGS. 43(d) and 43(e) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1315. First, the item lottery table B of FIG. 43(d) is used to select either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 10%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%. If the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "defeat rate UP" item is selected using the "defeat rate UP" lottery table B in FIG. 43(e). In this table, the "defeat rate? UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%, and the "defeat rate small UP" item is selected with a probability of 10%. For the item lottery here, the same table as the table used in step S1305 may be used so that the items obtained in the normal state and the items obtained in the confrontation state are the same.

In step S1317, the accumulated points are cleared (set to 0), and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1321, a process of acquiring the item selected in step S1305 or step S1315 is executed. In this process, the acquired item information is stored (added) in the RAM 308 . In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of "defeat 1 body" items possessed is set to 3, and the upper limit of the number of "defeat rate UP" items possessed is set to 8, respectively. When the number of possession of the selected item reaches the upper limit, no new item is acquired.

In step S1323, preparation for transmission of an item addition command is executed (transmitted in step S211 of FIG. 39), and this item addition processing ends. This item addition command includes information on the number of items possessed, the acquisition order, and the current accumulated points. This item addition command is sent even when no new items have been acquired.

Next, details of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in various lottery processes in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG.

First, in step S1401, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the confrontation setting condition is established. Here, the confrontation setting condition is established in the initial state. More specifically, it corresponds to the first game after setting change, the first game after RAM clearing, the first game after being defeated in confrontation state, and the first game after AT state ends. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1403; otherwise, this confrontation setting process ends.

In step S1403, the confrontation mode setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. In this embodiment, there are two types of confrontation modes, a normal mode and a chance mode. In the chance mode, the number of games required for laps is smaller than in the normal mode (shorter from the initial state to the confrontation state), it is easier to shift to the point specialization B state than in the normal mode, and the pseudo BB lottery is more likely than the normal mode. It has become easier to be elected to The table shown in FIG. 45(a) is set such that the setting probability of the chance mode increases as the set value increases. For example, in setting 1 where the player's advantage is the lowest, the setting probability of the chance mode is 20% (remaining 80% is the normal mode), but in setting 6 where the player's advantage is relatively highest, chance Mode setting probability is increased to 50% (remaining 50% is normal mode).

In step S1405, the precursor start zone setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the precursor start zone. In the present embodiment, zones are defined by dividing the number of games being played in a certain range, and zones 1 to 12 are shown in FIG. 45(b). In this step S1405, a zone is set to transition to the portent state (true portent state and false portent state) with a lottery probability corresponding to the confrontation mode.

First, the setting of the true precursor state will be described. Only one of a plurality of zones is set as the zone that transitions to the true precursor state. In the table of FIG. 45(b), any one of zones 6 to 12 (the number of games being played is 201 or more) is set when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, whereas when the chance mode is the zone Any one of 2 to 4 (the number of games being played is 1 to 150) is set. Therefore, the number of games required to reach the confrontation state is smaller in the chance mode.

Next, the setting of the false portent state will be described. Zones that transition to the false portent state are set by lottery for each of a plurality of zones. In the table of FIG. 45(b), when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, zones 3 to 11 (the number of games being played is 51 to 499) may each be set as a false omen start zone, and the chance mode In the case of , only zone 3 (the number of games being played is 51 to 100) may be set as the false portent start zone. As a result of this lottery, there are cases in which a plurality of zones transitioning to the false portent state are set, and there are cases in which only one zone is set. In addition, after transitioning to the true precursor state, it transitions to the confrontation state and returns to the initial state, so the true precursor state is the final precursor state among the precursor states that transition during the cycle. Therefore, the zones subsequent to the zone transitioning to the true precursor state may be excluded from the zones transitioning to the false precursor state.

In step S1407, the start game of the premonitory state is set for each zone set in step S1405, and the confrontation setting process ends. In this process, for example, when zone 6 is set as the zone to transition to the false portent state, the start game of the false portent state is set within the range of 201-250. Further, when zone 4 is set as the zone to shift to the true precursor state, the starting game of the true precursor state is set within the range of 101-150. Although the lottery probabilities of the starting game for the zones are equal, the probabilities may be biased.

In the confrontation setting process shown in FIG. 44, a zone is selected once and then a starting game is selected from within the zone. Any configuration may be used as long as the starting game is selected.

Next, the details of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a specific combination is internally won. Here, the specific combination means condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1505; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1505, lottery processing for transition to point specialization B state is executed using the table shown in FIG. 46(b). FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for transition to the point specialization B state. For example, if the condition device 2 (small hand 1, watermelon) is internally elected, if the confrontation mode is normal mode, it will be elected with a probability of 3/100 (shift to point specialization B state), and the confrontation mode is a chance If it is the mode, it wins with a probability of 50/100 (shifts to the point specialization B state). Then, when winning, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. After that, this point specialization B state transition lottery process is ended.

Next, details of AT-related processing (step S1209) in various lottery processing in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG.

First, in step S1601 executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1605; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1605, the acquisition lottery process for the "defeat 1 body" item is executed using the table shown in FIG. 48(a). In this table, there is a probability of 1% if a small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, and a small win 3 (strong cherry) is a 1% probability if a small win 2 (weak cherry) is won internally. 100% probability when internal winning is made in 2, and 13% probability when internal winning is made in small combination 4 (chance 4). In addition, when the number of possession of the "destroy 1 body" item has already reached the upper limit, the "destroy 1 body" item is not acquired. Further, when the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character has started in the confrontation state, the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615) which is executed prior to this, so the "defeat one character" is performed. ” Instead of the process of obtaining items, the result of this confrontation is rewritten. Specifically, if one of the three games includes a defeat of the main character, this one is overwritten as a victory of the main character. As a result, when the main character wins all three games, the AT state schedule flag is turned on, and the number of remaining AT games is set by lottery. The AT remaining game number lottery is the same as the AT remaining game number lottery in the confrontation result lottery process to be described later.

In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is five. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item. If the player does not possess the "killing rate UP" item, the process advances to step S1611; otherwise, the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1611, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining games in confrontation state, and the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1613, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. This condition is satisfied in the game immediately before the start of the showdown between the main character and the enemy character (starting when the number of remaining games in the showdown state is 3). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1615; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1615, a competition result lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the main character will win each of the three games. The initial value of the victory probability (destruction rate) of this hero character is 50%, but 6% is added as a basic addition for each "destruction rate UP" item, and the table shown in FIG. is used to increase the kill rate. For example, if there is a "destruction rate? UP" item, there is a 50/100 probability of 6% (6% base increase + 0% increase from the table), and a 50/100 probability of 11% (6% base increase). % + 5% table top-up) is added to the kill rate. Based on this added kill rate, a lottery is executed as to whether the main character will win each of the three games. Incidentally, if the result of the previous game is a loss, the lottery for the subsequent game may not be performed.

Also, if there is one "defeat one" item, the victory of the main character is determined instead of conducting a lottery for one game. That is, when there are three "destroy one" items, it is determined that the main character will win without lottery in all three games, and the transition to the AT state is ensured.

By the above processing, when the main character wins all three games, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON, and the number of AT remaining games is calculated using the table of FIG. 48(c). lottery and setting.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the AT-related processing is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1619.

In step S1619, the AT direct hit lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 48(d). Here, apart from the lottery processing in step S1615, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the table of FIG. 48(d), for example, when the set value is 1, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/7500, and when the set value is 6, the probability is 1/1000. If the lottery here is won, and if the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615), the result of this confrontation is rewritten as the main character's unanimous victory, and the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. At the same time, the number of remaining AT games is selected and set using the table of FIG. 48C (similar to the case where the AT state schedule flag is set to ON in step S1615). On the other hand, if the result of the confrontation has not yet been determined, the processing is executed so that the main character wins all rounds (for example, the "defeat one" item is added up to the upper limit).

In step S1621 to which the production state is not the confrontation state in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1623; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1623, a pseudo BB lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 48(e). According to this table, there is a probability of 1/500 when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, and a probability of 1/100 when the confrontation mode is the chance mode. If the player wins the prize, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and the state becomes possible to shift to the pseudo BB state in a later game.

In step S1625, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1627; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1627, lottery processing for adding the number of remaining AT games is executed using the table shown in FIG. 48(f). In this table, for example, when a small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, an addition is made with a probability of 1/13. Further, the number of additional games at that time is set to 20 with a probability of 9/100, 30 with a probability of 70/100, 50 with a probability of 20/100, and 100 with a probability of 1/100.

Next, details of the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the state update process (step S117) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01 executed first, a point acquisition process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A03, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 31, since the RT and the game state are in a one-to-one relationship, when the RT is updated, the game state is also updated.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the initial state, and if it is the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if not the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, initial state processing is executed. Here, the effect state is set to the point specialization A state, and 30 is set to the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state. After that, the process proceeds to step S1A35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization A state.

In step S1A11, point specialization A state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the point specialization A state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51(a).

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state. If the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A15. If not the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A17.

In step S1A15, normal state processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the normal state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51(b).

In step S1A17, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization B state, and if it is the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A19.

In step S1A19, point specialization B state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the point specialization B state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51(c).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a precursor state, and if it is a precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1A23, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A25.

In step S1A23, precursor state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the precursor state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A25, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state.

In step S1A27, confrontation state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the confrontation state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A29, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state, and if it is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A31, and if not the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A33.

In step S1A31, AT state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54(a).

In step S1A33, pseudo BB state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54(b).

At step S1A35, preparation for transmission of a state update command including information on the game state, RT, and effect state (sent at step S211 in FIG. 39) is executed, and this state update process is terminated.

Next, the details of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in the state update process of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 50(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG.

First, in step S1B01 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point acquisition condition is satisfied. The point acquisition conditions here are conditions that are satisfied in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the premonitory state. However, even in the normal state, the point earning condition is not met even in the normal state for a game (a game in which an item acquisition effect is executed) that is started when the accumulated points exceed 1000. If this point acquisition condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03, and if not, this point acquisition process is terminated.

In step S1B03, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 50(b). FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. For example, if you do not win internally in any of the condition devices in the normal state (if you lose), you will get 0 points with a probability of 90%, 5 points with a probability of 9%, and 1%. Gain 10 points with a probability. Then, the value of the acquired points is added to the accumulated points. In this description, the points acquired in one game will be referred to as acquired points, and the cumulative total of acquired points during a round will be referred to as accumulated points.

In step S1B05, preparations for transmitting acquisition point commands (sent in step S211 in FIG. 39) are executed. This command includes the value of acquired points and information on the effect state. After that, this point acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG.

First, in step S1C01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization A state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the point specialization A state processing is terminated.

In step S1C05, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization A state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG.

First, in step S1C11 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C13, point specialization B state setting processing is executed. Here, the presentation state is set to the point specialization B state, and the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is set to 5. After that, the process proceeds to step S1C15.

In step S1C15, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C17, it is determined whether or not the condition for transition to the precursor state is satisfied. This transition condition is established when the start game of the premonitory state set in the confrontation setting process (FIG. 44) is reached. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C19; otherwise, the normal state processing is terminated.

In step S1C19, the effect state is set to the portent state, and any value from 1 to 32 is set by lottery (the probability of each value being selected is equal) as the value of the number of remaining games in the portent state. After that, this normal state processing ends.

Next, details of the point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(c). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG.

First, in step S1C21 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization B state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C23.

In step S1C23, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C25; otherwise, the point specialization B state processing is terminated.

In step S1C25, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization B state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG.

First, in step S1D01 that is executed first, the value of the number of precursor state remaining games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D03.

In step S1D03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of precursor state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D05; otherwise, the precursor state processing is terminated.

In step S1D05, it is determined whether or not the precursor state is a true precursor state. If it is a true portent state, the process proceeds to step S1D07, and if it is not a true portent state (if it is a false portent state), the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D07, the presentation state is set to the confrontation state, and 5 is set as the number of remaining games in the confrontation state. After that, this precursor state processing ends.

In step S1D09, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the precursor state processing ends.

Next, details of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in the state update process of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in FIG.

First, in step S1E01, which is executed first, the number of remaining games in confrontation state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E13.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E11.

At step S1E07, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, the AT state schedule flag is set to OFF, and this confrontation state processing ends.

At step S1E11, the rendering state is set to the initial state, and the confrontation state processing ends.

In step S1E13, which proceeds when the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is not 0 in step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated in the confrontation effect being executed based on the result of the confrontation (set in the AT-related processing in FIG. 47). be judged. The values of the three confrontation effects and the number of remaining games in the confrontation state correspond to 3 for the first game, 2 for the second game, and 1 for the third game. Also, the confrontation results include information about the wins and losses of the three confrontations. Therefore, the number of games remaining in the current confrontation state is used to determine the number of the current battle, the win/loss corresponding to this is derived from the result of the confrontation, and it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E11; otherwise, the confrontation state process ends.

Next, details of the AT state processing (step S1A31) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT state process (step S1A31) in FIG.

First, in step S1F01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining AT games, and the process proceeds to step S1F03.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB symbol has stopped. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F07, the rendering state is set to the pseudo BB state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is set to a predetermined value (50 for pseudo BB1, 20 for pseudo BB2, see FIGS. 35 and 37(b)). is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13; otherwise, the AT state processing is terminated.

At step S1F13, the presentation state is set to the initial state, and the AT state processing ends.

Next, details of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in the state update processing of FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG.

First, in step S1F21 executed first, the value of the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F23.

In step S1F23, it is determined whether or not the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F25; otherwise, the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

At step S1F25, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 55(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 55(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is developed, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data. Details of this effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 55(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the effect control process (step S309) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, information acquisition update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3003. Various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In this information acquisition update process, information included in the various commands (RT, game state, effect state, accumulated points, acquired points, items , the number of remaining AT games, the number of AT additional games, etc.), and stores (updates) this information. The first sub-control section 400 executes various effects based on these pieces of information. When a power restoration command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the information about the game state and the performance state is updated based on the information included in the power restoration command, but the performance state is the point specialization A state. Only when information indicating that is received, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point specialization A state. For this reason, when power failure and power recovery occurs when the performance state of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, after the power is restored, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 's production state becomes inconsistent. In addition, this state of inconsistency in the presentation state is maintained until the presentation state of the main control unit 300 thereafter shifts to the normal state.

In step S3003, display point management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3005. The details of this display point management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57(a).

In step S3005, display item management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3007. The details of this display item management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3007, navigation-related display processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3009. For example, when the production state is the AT state, the number of AT remaining games and the number of AT additional games are displayed, and the number of medals obtained in that state is displayed. In addition, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to inform the correct operation order, and if the condition device 1 is internally won with the pseudo BB state schedule flag turned on, this pseudo BB. An effect is set to prompt the player to stop the role corresponding to the scheduled state flag. Further, when the AT state shifts to the pseudo BB state, if the conditions devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to notify the operation order of the correct answer, and medals are obtained continuously from the AT state. number is displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, the number of medals obtained is displayed through the AT state and the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, the value of the pseudo BB state remaining game number is displayed instead of the AT remaining game number, and the AT remaining game number is not subtracted.

In step S3009, other production setting processing is executed, and this production control processing is terminated. Here, for example, a process of displaying a background according to the rendering state of the first sub-controller 400 or executing an appropriate rendering is executed. In this process, if the display points have reached 1000 when all the reels have stopped, 1000 is subtracted from the display points, and a display indicating that the player has obtained the right to acquire an item in the next game (for example, ("Roulette x 1"). Further, in the confrontation state, a process of executing a confrontation effect based on the result of the confrontation is included. It should be noted that, in displaying the background according to the effect state in this processing, if the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, the background is displayed.

Next, details of the display point management process (step S3003) in the effect control process of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an acquisition point command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent (the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, and the first sub-control unit 400 is in the normal state). be done. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3105; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3105, the point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. This table is the same as the part of the table shown in FIG. 50(b) that is used when the effect state is the normal state. For example, if none of the condition devices are internally elected (in the case of a loss), 0 points are obtained with a probability of 90%, 5 points are obtained with a probability of 9%, and 10 points are obtained with a probability of 1%. Earn points. Note that this lottery process may be configured to be executed by the main control unit 300 . For example, when the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent, the acquisition points sent by the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 are derived separately from the normal acquisition points. and this value may be used in the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S3107, the acquired point value is added to the display points, and the process proceeds to step S3121. For the acquired points to be added here, the value of acquired points included in the acquired point command is used as it is. specified value is used. A display point is a point displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S3111, to which the acquired point information is not obtained in step S3101, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3113; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3113, the cumulative point value included in the item addition command is set as the display point value, and the process proceeds to step S3121. Note that if the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match, this process resolves the mismatch.

In step S3121, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display point is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the rendering state of the first sub-control section 400 is any of the initial state, point specialization A state, normal state, point specialization B state, portent state, and confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3123; otherwise, the display point management process ends.

In step S3123, processing for displaying the value of the display point is executed, and this display point management processing ends.

Next, details of the display item management process (step S3005) in the effect control process of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3005) in FIG.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3203, the information of the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the display point value is greater than 0, or whether or not "roulette x 1" is displayed. If any of these conditions are met, the process advances to step S3207; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3207, item acquisition effect setting processing is executed, and this display item management processing ends. Details of the item acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3211, which is followed when it is determined in step S3201 that information on item addition has not been obtained, it is determined whether or not an internal winning command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3213; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3213, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. When the effect state in the main control unit 300 is the showdown state, the internal winning command includes information on the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state is included in the game immediately before the showdown effect. be 4. That is, the above determination is for determining whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the confrontation effect. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S3215; otherwise. This display item management process ends.

At step S3215, an effect is set to use the "killing rate UP" item among the displayed items. Specifically, an effect of erasing all of the displayed "Kill Rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (match result determined in the AT-related processing of FIG. 47) is executed. Note that the above effect is not set when the "killing rate UP" item is not displayed.

In step S3217, the item information (possessed items and display items) stored in the RAM 408 is cleared, and the display item management process ends.

Next, details of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in the display item management process of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, the item currently displayed in the effect image display 157 is compared with information on the item currently possessed, and the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not there is a difference between the two items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3305, an item obtainment effect is set as a result of not obtaining an additional item, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not there is one item difference as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3313; otherwise (when there are multiple item differences), the process advances to step S3321.

In step S3313, an item obtainment effect indicating that an item has been obtained is set, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated. When an item is acquired (acquired in step S1321 in FIG. 43A) during normal game progress, the acquired item information is added to the possessed item information included in the item addition command. Since this information is not reflected in the displayed items, only the newly obtained one will be different when compared with the information of the items in possession. Based on the above, when the displayed item is compared with the information of the currently possessed item, and only the newly acquired item is different, the newly acquired item is added in step S3313. A production (item acquisition production) is set. Note that when the number of items possessed reaches the upper limit, although the item addition command is transmitted, there is no newly acquired item, so there is no difference even if the above comparison is made. In this case, the effect is set in the same manner as the item acquisition effect, in which the final item is not added (step S3305).

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of different items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3323.

In step S3323, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3325; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3325, an item acquisition effect is set to add the oldest of the "killing rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed among the items in possession, and this item acquisition effect setting process is terminated. When the power is restored due to the end of business hours, etc., the information of the items possessed by the main control unit 300 is restored (step S1011 in FIG. 40), but the first sub-control unit 400 Information about the displayed item is cleared from RAM 408 . If a new item is acquired in this state, the item displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the possessed item information included in the item addition command may differ for a plurality of items including the newly acquired item. have a nature. In this way, if the displayed item and the information of the possessed item are different from the information of the newly acquired item (determination of No in step S3311), the 3325) to add the oldest item among the "defeat rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed in step S3325. If the player does not possess the "Killing Rate UP" item, an item acquisition rendering for adding a newly acquired item is set (step S3313). However, when the production state is the confrontation state, the items to be obtained are different from those in the normal state (steps S1305 and S1315 in FIG. 43), so the oldest item among the "defeat rate UP" items possessed is If the item acquisition effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the effect state is the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect for adding a newly acquired item is set (Yes in step S3321).

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 60(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 60(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 60(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 60(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S409, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (announcement image, background image). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 60(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 60(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area between the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[From the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state]
Hereinafter, the flow from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a cycle, step S1009 in FIG. 40, step S1101 in FIG. 41). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle, step S1E11 in FIG. 53, step S1F13 in FIG. 54(a)). FIG. 61(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. "0000/1000" at the bottom left of this display indicates the total points on the display at the top and the upper limit of the total points on the display at the bottom. That is, the display of "0000/1000" indicates that the accumulated points are 0 points. This display of the points is displayed in the confrontation state until the result of the confrontation is displayed, and is not displayed in the AT state or the pseudo BB state (steps S3121 and S3123 in FIG. 57(a)). Note that in this embodiment, a value different from the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 may be displayed as the accumulated points on the display due to power failure and power restoration.

When the game is started in this state and one game ends (all reels are stopped), the display of the effect image display device 157 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 61(b). During this one game, the number of games to shift to the confrontation mode and the precursor state is set (FIG. 44). In FIG. 61(b), a message indicating that the confrontation mode has been set is displayed at the top of the screen. At the time of FIG. 61(a), the confrontation mode has not yet been set, and a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting has not been completed is displayed at the top of the screen. According to the number of games set here, it shifts to the precursor state.

Only one game is set in the initial state, and when the next game is started from the state of FIG. 61(b), the state shifts to the point specialization A state (step S1A07 of FIG. 49). FIG. 61(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the point specialization A state is set. This point specialization A state is a state in which the points for obtaining items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 50(b)). A message is displayed in the upper part of the screen indicating that it is in a state where it is easy to After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C05 in FIG. 51(a)). FIG. 61(d) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set.

[From the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state, until the production state returns to the normal state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 62, the flow from the normal state to the point specializing B state or false portent state to the normal state again will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state changes from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. In this presentation state, points may be obtained based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (see FIG. 50). FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. FIG. 62(a) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 62(b) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. From this normal state, it shifts to any of the point specialization B state, the false portent state, and the true portent state. Of these, the point specialization B state and the false portent state transition to the normal state again, whereas the true portent state does not transition to the normal state. Here, the transition to the point-specific B state and the false portent state will be described.

In the normal state, a lottery for transition to the point specialization B state is executed based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (Fig. 46). ) step S1C13). FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization B state is set. In addition, FIG.62(c) is an example of the state in which the item is not displayed, and FIG.62(d) is an example of the state in which the item is displayed. This point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 50(b)). A message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating that the number is likely to increase. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C25 in FIG. 51(c)).

In addition, in the normal state, when the number of games to start the false precursory state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the false precursory state (the number of remaining precursory precursory games) is set and the transition to the false precursory state is made (FIG. 51(b)). ) step S1C19). FIGS. 62(e) and 62(f) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the false portent state is set. FIG. 62(e) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 62(f) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This false portent state is a state in which the points for obtaining items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 50(b)). In FIGS. 62(e) and 62(f), a message indicating a precursor state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. This screen is the same screen as the true precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. This false portent state transitions to a normal state after the set number of games has passed (step S1D09 in FIG. 52).

[Acquisition of items when the production state is normal]
The flow of item acquisition when the rendering state is the normal state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state.

In a normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for an acquired item is executed in exchange for this predetermined number of accumulated points (route of Yes in step S1303 in FIG. 43(a)). , an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 58, FIG. 59). FIGS. 63(a) to 63(f) show an example of changes due to this item acquisition effect.

First, FIG. 63(a) shows that the cumulative points on the display have reached 1000 in the normal state. When all the reels are stopped in this state, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points on the display as shown in FIG. 63(b), and "Roulette x 1" indicates that the right to acquire the item in the next game has been obtained. is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the display of "Roulette x 1" shown in Fig. 63(b) is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Fig. 63(c). Further, as shown in FIG. 63(d), a roulette effect is executed in which one is selected from three of "defeat one", "defeat rate? UP", and "chance". Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 63(e) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been acquired. Also, FIG. 63(f) shows that the display of the items acquired in the next game is added.

"Defeat 1" and "Defeat rate? UP" in FIG. 63(d) indicate the obtainability of the item with the same name. Also, the display of "chance" indicates the acquisition possibility of some item. In addition, when the number of items reaches the upper limit and cannot be obtained, this "chance" is selected and an effect that the item cannot be obtained is executed. In other words, the options displayed during the item acquisition effect are not limited to items with the same name. good too.

In addition, as described above, there are cases where you can move from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the precursor state to acquire more points, but in the point specialization B state or the precursor state, items cannot be obtained. It's becoming For this reason, for example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the point specialization B state (or precursor state) may shift to the normal state, but only one item can be obtained in one game. there is For example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the item acquisition process is executed continuously for two games.

[From the normal state to the true omen state, and then to the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of the flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the confrontation state. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and transitions to the confrontation state.

FIG. 64(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. In the normal state, when the number of games to start the true precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the true precursor state (the number of games remaining in the precursor state) is set and the state shifts to the true precursor state (see FIG. 51(b)). step S1C19). FIG. 64(b) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this true precursor state is set. This true omen state is a state in which the points for obtaining items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 50(b)). In FIG. 64(b), a message indicating a precursory state is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Note that this screen is the same screen as the false precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. When the set number of games has passed, this true precursor state shifts to a confrontation state (step S1D07 in FIG. 52). FIG. 64(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this confrontation state is set.

[Regarding item acquisition effects during confrontation]
The flow of item acquisition when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65(a) to (c). This figure is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is a confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, an effect is executed to indicate that the state has shifted to the confrontation state in the first game, but if there are accumulated points remaining in this game, items can be obtained in exchange for them (see FIG. 43(a)). Yes at step S1313), an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 58, FIG. 59) is executed. Since there is no route to transition from the confrontation state to the normal state, and item acquisition in the normal state is not performed in the current round, 130 points are wasted. For this reason, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items can be acquired in exchange for the remaining points that do not reach 1000 points in the normal state.

First, FIG. 65(a) shows that there are 130 accumulated points on the display in the game (true precursor state) immediately before shifting to the confrontation state. Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the game, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the accumulated points on the display are set to 0, and "1 body defeated", "Defeat rate? UP", "Defeat rate small UP". ” is executed. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 65(c) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired. It should be noted that the content of the item acquisition effect here may be the same as the item acquisition effect in the normal state, or may be different.

The above is the effect executed in the first game in the confrontation state. In the second game, if the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, an effect using this item is executed (FIGS. 65(d) to (f)). On the other hand, when the "Killing rate UP" item is not displayed, a confrontation effect starts (Fig. 65(g)).

[Regarding item use effect during showdown]
The flow of item use when the presentation state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65(d) to (f). This figure shows an example of the item use effect when the effect state is the confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, if the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game (Yes in step S3213 of FIG. 58). . First, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the second game in the showdown state, a message "Defeat rate UP challenge" is displayed at the top of the screen as shown in FIG. 65(d). Further, when all the reels are stopped, a message "Press the 〇〇 button!" is displayed as shown in FIG. The victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character due to the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased. FIG. 65(f) shows that the hero character's victory probability (defeat rate) is 72% due to the "defeat rate UP" item. It should be noted that it is not limited to the example in which the kill rate is displayed by the button operation described above, and the configuration may be such that the kill rate is displayed without requiring such an operation. Further, the operation means used for button operation may be used for the progress of the game, or may be the operation means provided for performance regardless of the progress of the game.

The confrontation effect is started from the next game after the game in which the item use effect is executed. It should be noted that if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed at the end of the first game of the confrontation effect, the above item use effect is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started from the second game (Fig. 65(g)). is started.

[Regarding the case where all the confrontation effects in the confrontation state are won]
Hereinafter, the case where the game is completely won in the showdown performance in the showdown state will be described with reference to FIG. 66 . This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the showdown effect is completely won.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 47), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 56). It should be noted that the "defeat rate UP" item and the "defeat 1 body" item make it easier for the main character to win and to transition to the AT state (see the process of step S1615 in FIG. 47).

FIG. 66(a) shows an example of the start of the first game of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 66(b) shows an example of the case where the first game of the confrontation effect is won. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 66(b), the characters "1 body witnessed" indicating that the player won the first battle are displayed. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 66(c) shows an example of the start of the second battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 66(d) shows an example of winning the second race of the confrontation effect. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 66(d), the characters "Double Witness" are displayed to indicate that the player has won the second battle. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 66(e) shows an example of the start of the third battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 66(f) shows an example of winning the third race of the confrontation effect. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen in FIG. 66(f), the characters "Three bodies witnessed" are displayed to indicate that the player has won the third battle. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

In the case where the confrontation effect is to win all games, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON at the time of lottery for the result of the confrontation preceding this. As a result, the next game in which all wins have been achieved in the confrontation effect is shifted to the AT state (Yes in step S1E05 of FIG. 53). FIG. 66(g) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set.

[Regarding the case of losing the showdown during the showdown]
A case where the player loses in the confrontation presentation in the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case in which the player loses in the confrontation effect.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 47), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 56).

FIG. 67(a) shows an example of the start of the first battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 67(b) shows an example of the defeat in the first race of the confrontation effect. As in the example of FIG. 66, when the confrontation effect is completely won, the state shifts to the AT state, but when the main character loses in the confrontation effect, the next game shifts to the initial state (step S1E11 in FIG. 53). FIG. 67(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. After shifting to the initial state, various settings are executed and the next cycle starts.

[Transition from AT state to pseudo BB or initial state]
The flow from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of an effect that is executed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state.

In the AT state, the player can make more profit by notifying the order of pressing the correct answer when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate hands of minor hands 6 to 8) are internally won (step S3007 in FIG. 56). It is in a state where it can be obtained. FIG. 68(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set. In the example of FIG. 68(a), three numbers are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. In addition, at the bottom left of the screen, the number of games remaining in AT state and the number of games played so far in AT state are displayed. The number of medals is displayed. The AT state shifts to the initial state when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 (step S1F13 in FIG. 54). FIG. 68(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. Note that the number of AT remaining games may be added (step S1627 in FIG. 47).

Also, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable transition to the pseudo BB state (step S1623 in FIG. 47). If the lottery is won, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and an effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the replay role 2 or replay role 3, which is a pseudo BB symbol (step S3007 in FIG. 56). Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 stops, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state (step S1F07 in FIG. 54(a)).

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate hands of minor hands 6 to 8) are internally elected, the pressing order of the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. (Step S3007 in FIG. 56). FIG. 68(b) shows an example of display on the effect image display device 157 when the pseudo BB state is set. In the example of FIG. 68(b), three numbers are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. In addition, the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state and the number of games in the pseudo BB state up to the present are displayed at the lower left of the screen. Also, the number of earned medals is displayed continuously from the AT state at the bottom right of the screen. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed (step S1F25 in FIG. 54(b)).

[Regarding the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit 400]
The operations of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

As described in the operation examples of FIGS. 61 to 68, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the points acquired in the normal state, point specialization A state, point specialization B state, and precursor state, The cumulative points increase, and items are acquired in exchange for a predetermined value (1000 in the embodiment) of cumulative points. In the example of FIG. 69 (the upper part of the figure), the effect state changes from the initial state to the normal state through the point specialization A state, and in the next game after reaching 1000 points (total P in the figure), 1000 It is shown that the item "Medium kill rate UP" was obtained in exchange for the accumulated points (Main control: Medium UP added to the possessed item column). Also, after that (lower part of the figure), in the next game when the total points reached 1010, in exchange for 1000 total points, the "kill rate small UP" item (main control: small UP added to the possession item column) was acquired. is shown. Here, only 10 accumulated points remain and are used in the next game and thereafter.

The above operations are executed by the main control unit 300, but these states are reflected by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. First, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 reflects the effect state of the main control unit 300 (step S1A35 in FIG. 49, step S3001 in FIG. 56), and the effect state such as the operation examples in FIGS. state according to

Also, in the first sub-control section 400, the points obtained for each game are added to the display points (step S3107 in FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69, the display points and the accumulated points of the main control section 300 are the same. By displaying the display point value, the player can grasp the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 (step S3123 in FIG. 57(a)).

Furthermore, in the first sub-control unit 400, when an item is acquired in the main control unit 300, the information of the possessed item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). is updated (step S3207 in FIG. 58, step S3313 in FIG. 59). FIG. 69 shows that in the game in which the possessed item is added in the main control section 300, the item acquisition effect is executed and the display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added.

[Handling of points in the event of a power outage/restoration]
70 and 71, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. 70 and 71 are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences a power failure and a power recovery.

In FIG. 69, the operation of reflecting the state of the main control section 300 in the first sub-control section 400 has been described. However, when the power is restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. The accumulated points and the displayed points of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. FIG. 70(a) shows an example in which the power failure and power recovery occurred at the time when the cumulative point value reached 500. FIG. In this case, there is no change in the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. In this case, since the display points increase from this point, although the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 and the amount of increase are the same, the values do not match.

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated. (Step S3207 in FIG. 58, Step S3313 in FIG. 59). FIG. 70(a) shows that in a game in which a possessed item is added in the main control section 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added. there is Also, at this time, the value of the accumulated points is reflected in the value of the displayed points (step S3113 in FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, from this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match. In this case, the item acquisition effect is executed before the display points reach 1,000.

Unlike the above example, when power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, not only the points but also the production state are configured to be inconsistent ( Step S3001 in FIG. 56). FIG. 70(b) shows an example in which power failure and power recovery occur when the presentation state is the point specialization A state and the cumulative point value reaches 500. In FIG. In this case, there is no change in the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. Also, it is shown that the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state. ing. In this case, the amount of increase in display points does not reflect the amount of increase in accumulated points of main control section 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 57(a)). FIG. 70(b) shows that there are cases where the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points do not match. Specifically, after the power failure, the accumulated points increase in the order of 20, 200, 0, 0 from 500, while the display points increase in the order of 0, 5, 20, 5, 0. ing. After that, when the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the production state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here on, as in FIG. , the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-controller 400 is the same. Then, when the total points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 58, step S3313 in FIG. 59), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 57(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

FIG. 71 shows an example in which a power failure and power recovery occurs immediately after the presentation state shifts from the initial state to the point specialization A state. In this example, both the cumulative points and the display points immediately after power restoration are zero. 70(b), the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state. ing. In this case, as in FIG. 70(b), the amount of increase in display points does not reflect the amount of increase in accumulated points of main control unit 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 57(a)). ). FIG. 71 shows that there are cases where the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points do not match. After that, when the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here the main control unit 300 , and the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become the same. Then, when the total points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control unit 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 58, step S3313 in FIG. 59), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 57(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (1)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 72A and 72B are diagrams showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occur in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 72, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "medium kill rate UP" item is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "medium kill rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). In the example of FIG. 72, an example of acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item is shown, and in this case, information is transmitted that the user possesses a "medium kill rate UP" item and a "small kill rate UP" item. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 72, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 72). 59 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 72, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which is not yet displayed, of the "medium kill rate UP" item and the "small kill rate UP" item is obtained. It will be. In the example of FIG. 72, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 72, it is shown that the rendering state has changed to the confrontation state after that. In this example, when there are a "medium kill rate UP" item and a "low kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, an item use effect in a confrontation state is executed. (Item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 72). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 47 step S1615). FIG. 72 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (2)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 73A and 73B are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 73, as a result of a power outage and restoration in a state in which the item "Medium Destruction Rate UP" is possessed and a state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 73 shows an example in which the "destroy 1 body" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "improved kill rate" item and the "destroy 1 body" item are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 73, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 73). 59 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 73, an effect is executed in which the oldest item that has not yet been displayed is the "medium defeat rate UP" item. In the example of FIG. 73, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 73, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and a "Defeat 1 body" item as possessed items, and a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item is displayed, and an item use effect is executed in a confrontation state. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 73). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 47). FIG. 73 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (3)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 74A and 74B are diagrams showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occur in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 74, as a result of a power failure and restoration in a state in which two items of "Medium Destruction Rate UP" are possessed and a state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 possesses the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item. An example is shown in which there is information but this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). In the example of FIG. 74, an example of acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item is shown, and in this case, information is sent that two "medium kill rate UP" items and a "small kill rate UP" item are possessed. be done. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 74, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 74). 59 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 74, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not yet been displayed, of the two items "Medium Destruction Rate UP" and "Small Destruction Rate UP" item is obtained. will be In the example of FIG. 74, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 74, it is shown that the production state has changed to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are two "Medium Destruction Rate UP" items and a "Small Destruction Rate UP" item as possessed items, and with the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item as a display item, the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. A case will be described (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 74). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (step S1615 in FIG. 47). FIG. 74 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (4)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an operation example in the case where power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 75, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "defeat 1" and the item "defeat rate UP" and in the state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 "defeats 1". ' item and a 'medium kill rate UP' item, but this item is not displayed (there is no displayed item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 75 shows an example in which the "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 75, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 75). 59 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 75, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which is not displayed yet, of the "medium kill rate UP" item and the "small kill rate UP" item is obtained. It will be. In the example of FIG. 75, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 75, it is shown that the rendering state has changed to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are "defeat 1" item, "medium kill rate UP" item, and "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and in a state where there is a "medium kill rate UP" item as a display item, in the confrontation state A case where an item use effect is executed will be described (although an item acquisition effect may be executed in a confrontation state, it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 75). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 47 step S1615). FIG. 75 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (5)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 76A and 76B are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 76, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 76 shows an example in which the "defeat rate small UP" item is obtained, and in this case, the information that the player possesses the "defeat 1 body" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 76, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 76). 59 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 76, an effect is executed in which the oldest item that has not yet been displayed is the "low kill rate UP" item. In the example of FIG. 76, it is shown that the item "defeat rate small UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 76, it is shown that the production state has changed to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "defeat 1" item and a "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "small kill rate UP" item is displayed, and an item use effect is executed in a confrontation state. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "defeat rate small UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (FIG. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 76). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 47). FIG. 76 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (6)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 77A and 77B are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 77, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "Medium Destruction Rate UP" is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items). Further, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 77, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 77) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 43A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 77 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "Medium Killing Rate UP" item and the "Killing Rate? UP" item are possessed are transmitted. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 59). In the example of FIG. 77, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 72) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example of FIG. 77 shows that the item "Killing Rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 77, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and there is a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 77). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 47 step S1615). FIG. 77 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (7)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of operation in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 78, as a result of a power outage and restoration in a state in which a "medium defeat rate UP" item and a "low defeat rate UP" item are possessed and a state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 displays "medium defeat rate". UP" item and "Low Kill Rate UP" item are present, but these items are not displayed (there are no displayed items). Further, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 78, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 78) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 43A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 78 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is obtained, and in this case, the player possesses the "Medium Killing Rate UP" item, the "Small Killing Rate UP" item, and the "Killing Rate? UP" item. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 59). In the example of FIG. 78, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 72) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example of FIG. 78 shows that the item "Killing Rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 78, in a state in which the possessed items include the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item, and the displayed item is the "defeat rate? UP" item, the item use presentation in the confrontation state is performed. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 78). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (step S1615 in FIG. 47). FIG. 78 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (8)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 79, as a result of a power failure and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items). Further, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 79, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the total points (135 in the example of FIG. 79) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 43A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). The example of FIG. 79 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "Killing 1 Body" item and the "Killing Rate? UP" item are possessed are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 59). In the example of FIG. 79, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 72) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 79, it is shown that the item "defeat rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 79, the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed in a state in which the possessed items include the "Defeat 1 body" item and the "Defeat rate? UP" item, and the displayed item is the "Defeat rate? UP" item. be done. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 58). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 65). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 79). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 47). FIG. 79 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the following confrontation production (right side of FIG. 79).

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (9)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, when power is restored after power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. described the operation of Similarly, in the example of FIG. 80, 130 is maintained as the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, while the display point of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power failure and power recovery. It is shown that In this example, the item is not in possession at the time of power failure.

In the example of FIG. 80, it is shown that the rendering state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (130 in the example of FIG. 80) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 43A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 43(a)). In the example of FIG. 80, an example of acquiring the "defeat 1 body" item is shown, and in this case, the information that the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 58). However, the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state is not executed when the display point is 0 (No in step S3205 of FIG. 58). The example of FIG. 80 shows that the item "defeated 1 body" is obtained, but is not displayed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 80, there is a "Defeat 1 body" item as a possessed item, but since there is no display item, the item use effect in the confrontation state is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started. In the example of FIG. 80, it is shown that the first game of the confrontation effect is executed in the second game in the confrontation state. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment employs a configuration in which cumulative points are obtained as the game progresses, items are acquired according to the cumulative points, and an item acquisition effect is executed at that time. When the item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so the degree of acquisition of accumulated points can improve the interest in the game. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value.

Also, what can be obtained when the points reach the target value may be an item that brings an advantageous state to the player like the item of the present embodiment, or an item that provides information about the gaming machine. There may be, and some effect may be executed like the item acquisition effect of the present embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display point is managed by the first sub-controller 400, and is cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is cut off and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the cumulative points and the display points do not match (the value of the cumulative points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1000. By adopting a configuration in which the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match when some condition (in this embodiment, power failure and power recovery) is established like this configuration, the displayed points (display points) Even when is less (or more) than the target value, an event such as item acquisition can be expected to occur.

In the above description, the case where the value of the accumulated points is maintained even if the power is cut off and the power is restored has been described. is pressed and the setting is changed), and in this case, the value of the accumulated points is cleared to the initial value (0) after the power failure and power recovery (step S1009 in FIG. 40, step S1101 in FIG. 41). . In this case, even if power is cut off and restored, the accumulated points and the displayed points will match. In other words, as states after power failure and power restoration, there are states in which the cumulative points and the display points match (with reset processing) and states in which they do not match (without reset processing). For this reason, for example, when a power failure occurs in all the game machines in the store due to the end and start of business of the shop, the states of the game machines can be changed so that the player can grasp the state of the game machines. can be made difficult. In addition, as a state after a power failure and power recovery in the case of reset processing, a configuration in which the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points (for example, the initial value of the display points is randomly determined, Alternatively, the initial value may be a value obtained by adding a predetermined value to the initial value of the total points. In this case, the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match both with and without the reset process, making it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the update amount of the accumulated points when the production state is the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the precursor state is larger than the update amount of the accumulated points when the production state is the normal state. (Fig. 50(b)). It is not necessary to adopt such a configuration that causes a difference in the update amount of the cumulative points depending on the state, but by providing such a state, the game becomes sharper and the interest in the game is improved. Even if the number of points is small, if the update amount is large, the player may be expected to continue playing the game enthusiastically.

Further, in the present embodiment, if power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, the normal states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent. The update amounts of the point and the display point are different (step S3105 in FIG. 57(a), FIGS. 70 and 71). In this case, the change in the amount of update of the displayed points (display points) makes it appear that the player is at a disadvantage, but actually the player is in an advantageous state. In this way, when the power is interrupted and the power is restored in a state in which the update of the total points and the display points is advantageous to the player, the update amount of the points (display points) displayed after the power is restored is By making it different, it is possible to hide a state that is actually advantageous to the player. In addition, players who are familiar with this configuration can expect that even if the situation seems to be disadvantageous at first glance, it may actually be an advantageous situation. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the above operation occurs when a power failure and power recovery occurs in the point specialization A state. The above operation should be performed when a power failure occurs in the state B). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or power recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the normal state is displayed instead of the background of the point specialization A state, which is actually advantageous to the player. This further enhances the effect of hiding the state where the user is in the state (step S3009 in FIG. 56).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, a configuration is adopted in which the initial state changes to the point specialization A state and then the normal state. In other words, after the setting change, the update amount of the accumulated points is in an advantageous state before the player is in a disadvantageous state. In this case, if the settings are left as they are after the settings are changed, there is a risk that the player who sees that the point specialization A state will be recognized as to whether or not the settings have been changed. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed by causing a power failure and power recovery at the point of transition to the point specialization A state.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (2)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item acquisition effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. In addition, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be one, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the information of the displayed item is made the same as the information of the possessed item. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information of the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable if the item use effect is executed in spite of the existence of the information of the possessed item. In this embodiment, by re-displaying the item that was not displayed when a new item is acquired in the normal state, it is possible to execute the item use effect without any sense of incongruity (FIGS. 72 to 75). Note that the timing of redisplay is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but if the timing of the item use effect is determined in advance, it may be earlier. In any case, it is sufficient that the items that were displayed before the power failure are displayed again after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed. In addition, if there are multiple items that are not displayed due to a power outage, by redisplaying less than this number of items at once, a large number of items can be redisplayed at once. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from being displayed (FIG. 74). In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "defeat rate UP" is to be redisplayed, but the item "destroy 1 body" is not to be redisplayed. In this way, items to be redisplayed and items not to be redisplayed may be provided, and a configuration in which items are uniformly redisplayed may be adopted. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, items to be redisplayed are targeted for the item use effect, while items that are not to be redisplayed are not targeted for the item use effect. In this configuration, by redisplaying the item that is the target of the item use presentation, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that by redisplaying an item that has not been displayed due to a power outage at the timing of the item acquisition effect as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce discomfort during redisplay. Also, by storing the information about acquired items, it may be possible to prevent the player from being put in a disadvantageous state.

It should be noted that, for example, even in the case of a configuration in which the possessed item of the main control unit 300 changes to a more advantageous item based on the internal winning condition device, the above-described item re-display configuration can be employed. In this case, the redisplayed item becomes more advantageous, and the interest in the game may be enhanced. Note that, in this configuration, the items displayed before the power failure and the items displayed after the power failure are displayed differently.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (3)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. In addition, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be one, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the information of the displayed item is made the same as the information of the possessed item. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information on the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, if the item use effect is executed as it is despite the information of the possessed item, the player may feel uncomfortable. In this embodiment, an opportunity to obtain a new item is provided in the first game in a confrontation state, and a configuration is adopted in which the item used in the item use effect can be displayed (step S1315 in FIG. 43(a)). With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which no sense of incongruity is caused even if the item use effect is subsequently executed (FIGS. 77 to 79).

Note that in this embodiment, the types of items that can be obtained in the confrontation state and the types of items that can be obtained in the normal state are different, so there is a risk that if an item that is not displayed in the confrontation state is redisplayed, a sense of incongruity may occur. There is For this reason, the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state are the items acquired in the confrontation state, not the items that are no longer displayed when the power is restored. The timing of item acquisition and item acquisition effect is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, but if the timing of item use effect is predetermined, it may be earlier. In any case, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the power restoration, until the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect will be executed for the newly obtained item and the item will be used. Any configuration can be used as long as it is used for display. Note that, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of items that are not displayed due to a power failure, only one item can be obtained and displayed as a result in the confrontation state. With this configuration, if there are multiple items that are not displayed, a smaller number of items will be newly displayed. If new items can be acquired in accordance with the number of items that are not displayed, there is a risk that the player's interests will not be balanced or that the player will feel uncomfortable. If the number of newly displayed items is set to be smaller than the number of items that are not displayed, as in , it may be possible to prevent the item use effect from giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "Kill Rate UP" is targeted for the item use effect, but the item "Defeat 1 body" is not targeted for the item use effect. In this way, not all items are subject to the item use effect, but some items may be subject to the item use effect and others may not. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the "Kill Rate UP" item, which is the object of the item use effect, may be displayed in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state (FIGS. 77 to 79). With this configuration, when there is an item that is not displayed, the item that is the target of the item use effect can be displayed, and the item use effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the item that is the target of the item use effect is not displayed due to the power failure and power recovery. is reflected in (FIGS. 77 and 78). As in this configuration, even if the item targeted for the item use effect is not displayed due to power failure and power restoration, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the power restoration, until the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly obtained item and the item is displayed. In doing so, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an item of the same type as the item displayed before the power failure is newly acquired. As a specific example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the "small kill rate UP" item is no longer displayed, a new "medium kill rate UP" item is acquired.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (4)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item acquisition effect is executed and the item is displayed. Acquisition of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value. In this embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. In addition, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be one, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display point is managed by the first sub-controller 400, and is cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is cut off and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure and power recovery occurs, the cumulative points and the display points do not match (the value of the cumulative points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1000. Here, when the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired (FIG. 80). By setting cases where the item acquisition effect is executed and when it is not executed when an item is acquired, as in this configuration, even if the item acquisition effect is not executed, the fact that the item has been acquired can be determined. can be expected.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, on condition that the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed even when the item is acquired. Even if the display point is 0, if the item acquisition effect is performed, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur. However, as in the configuration of this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which whether or not to execute the item acquisition effect is determined according to some displayed value, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the case where the display point is 0 means that the value of the display point has not changed after the power is turned off and the power is restored. sometimes it is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for transition to the true precursor state is set, and the number of games for transitioning to the confrontation state from there is set separately. That is, it can be said that the timing of transition to the confrontation state is set based on the number of games. Also, in this confrontation state, a new item may be acquired in the first game. These configurations can be said to be configurations in which items may be obtained based on the number of elapsed games. By combining this configuration with a configuration that provides a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the number of games while expecting that the item has been acquired. .

It should be noted that the advantage of the acquired item may differ depending on whether or not the item acquisition effect is executed when the item is acquired. For example, the acquired item may be more advantageous when the item acquisition effect is not executed than when the item acquisition effect is executed. In the case of this configuration, expectations can be heightened even when the item acquisition effect is not executed.

In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (5)]
In this embodiment, if there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, and the showdown state is entered, the hidden item will not be displayed. is derived, the player is not in a disadvantageous state. Here, unlike the present embodiment, in the event that there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage and the state shifts to a confrontation state, this item is displayed before the item is erased by the item use effect. may be An example of this configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before the item is used (erased).

In this FIG. 81, it is assumed that the state is shifted to the confrontation state in the same flow as in FIG. 78, and the item acquisition effect is executed. Specifically, when the total points are 130 and the power is cut off and restored while the player has the "medium kill rate UP" item and the "small kill rate UP" item, the main control unit 300 cannot read these information. is retained, but the display will be in a state where there are no items or accumulated points, and then the production state will transition to a confrontation state via the true sign state, and the item acquisition production by the accumulated points will result in a "defeat rate ?UP” item is acquired.

In the example of FIG. 78, the item use effect is executed in the next game, and at the timing of the third stop, the kill rate is displayed and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased (see FIGS. 65(d)-(f)). ). At this time, the hidden "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and "Small Destruction Rate UP" item are not displayed again. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 81, at the timing of the next game start operation, the item acquisition effect and re-display are executed for the hidden "defeat rate medium UP" item and "defeat rate small UP" item, and the third item is displayed. After the kill rate is displayed at the timing of the stop, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted. The lower half of FIG. 81 shows changes in display and non-display of items in this game.

In the example of FIG. 81, items that are hidden due to a power outage are redisplayed at a timing different from normal. It is good also as a structure provided. In this configuration, there are a plurality of display timings for the items, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. For example, in the example of FIG. 81 above, when the item display timing is after the third stop operation (display associated with item acquisition), and when it is after the game start operation (display of hidden items in confrontation state). There are two ways. That is, there are cases where the stop operation in the game has ended (after the third stop operation) and cases where it has not ended yet (after the start operation and before the third stop operation). By displaying the items, the interest in the game can be improved. Especially in the example of FIG. 81, the frequency of item display at the end of the game is higher than the frequency of item display during the game, which may surprise the player during the game. Also, as in the example of FIG. 81, items are displayed in a game in which an item use effect is executed, and by associating one of a plurality of display timings, item display at this timing can be displayed. Anticipation can be improved. Also, as in the example of FIG. 81, by associating one of a plurality of display timings with the timing of redisplaying an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for item display at this timing. can be improved. In the example of FIG. 81, depending on the item display timing, the number of displayed items may be one (item display based on accumulated points), or may be one or more (redisplay of hidden items). ), however, by configuring the number of items to be displayed at a plurality of display timings in this manner, it may be possible to improve expectations for item display.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (6)]
As described in the above [Handling of points when power failure and power recovery occurs] and [Handling of items when power failure and power recovery occurs (1)], etc., in this embodiment, When power is applied, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display points and display items are cleared in the first sub-control unit 400 . Further, when power failure occurs when the effect state is the point specialization A state, the normal state effect is executed after the power is restored. FIG. 82(a) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 82(a1)) are cleared after power is restored (FIG. 82(a2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the presentation of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure becomes the presentation of the normal state after the power is restored.

With the above configuration, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the slot machine 100 at the end of business hours at the start of business hours on the following day. However, for example, if power is cut off due to a lightning strike during a game, the display after the power is restored does not match the display before the power cut off, which may confuse the player or reduce the desire to play. be. Therefore, if power failure occurs while one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during game play), the display after power recovery may be configured to match the display before power failure. good. FIG. 82(b) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 82(b1)) are still displayed after power is restored (FIG. 82(b2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the effect of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure is still being executed after the power is restored. In this example, the characters "reel spinning" are displayed in the center of the screen so that the player can understand that the game is in progress after the power is restored, but this display may be omitted. . In the example of FIG. 82(b), the display points, display items, and background all match before and after the power failure. Even if the display before and after the power is restored is made to match, it may be possible to prevent confusion and loss of motivation to play. That is, when power failure occurs while any one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during a game), the display before the power failure is executed after the power is restored, and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. In that case, after the power is restored, a display different from the display before the power failure may be executed. In this case, the target display is not limited to the display including all of the display point, the display item, and the background as in the example of FIG. 82, and may be a display including any of these.

In order to realize the above operation, for example, in the present embodiment, the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared due to power failure, so when the reels 110 to 112 resume rotation when the power is restored, the main control unit 300 Information may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and the state before the power failure may be restored based on this information. Further, in the case where the information of the first sub-controller 400 is not cleared due to power interruption, the information of the first sub-controller 400 is maintained when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is restarted when power is restored, The above operation can also be realized by a configuration in which the information in the first sub-controller 400 is cleared when it is not accompanied. Note that the configuration for realizing the above operation is not particularly limited.

≪Others≫
In the embodiment using FIGS. 31 to 82, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but it is not limited to this, and game balls ( For example, it can be applied to a slot machine using pachinko balls as a game medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a Jankyu game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

The present embodiment has been described above with reference to FIGS. 31 to 82, but it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the technical idea. can. And, it can be said that those accompanied by such deformations and changes are based on the same technical idea and are included in the same technical scope. Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects, and the actions and effects are not limited to those described in the embodiments.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
The configurations of the invention described in the description using FIGS. 31 to 82 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first updating means (eg, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (eg, cumulative points) in a direction approaching a predetermined value (eg, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game table comprising
The display means is
A predetermined effect (for example, item acquisition effect during normal state) can be displayed based on the fact that the value of the first counter reaches the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, when updating the value of the second counter to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 69), the value of the first counter There are cases (e.g., FIGS. 70 and 71) that do not update the value of the second counter to the same value as
(See [Characteristics of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter is likely to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When a power failure and power recovery occurs in the second state, the amount of update of the value of the first counter and the amount of update of the value of the second counter are different (for example, the Step S3105, FIG. 70, FIG. 71),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display a first background in the first state (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 61(d)),
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 61(c)),
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background of the normal state, step S3009 of FIG. 56) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
A first updating means (for example, , main control unit 300);
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game table comprising
The display means is
A predetermined effect (for example, item acquisition effect during normal state) can be displayed based on the fact that the value of the first counter reaches the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, when updating the value of the second counter to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 69), the value of the first counter There are cases where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIG. 70, FIG. 71),
The first update means is
It may or may not be accompanied by reset processing after power failure and power recovery (for example, reset processing is accompanied by pressing the RAM clear button and changing settings),
When reset processing is required after power failure and power recovery, the value of the first counter is set to the initial value, while when power failure and power recovery is not accompanied by reset processing, the first counter before power failure is set. (For example, when reset processing is involved, the total points are set to 0 in step S1009 in FIG. 40 and step S1101 in FIG. 41),
The second updating means is
After the power is restored, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value or an initial value different from the initial value. and the total points and the display points match, or the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points to make the total points and the display points not match),
(See [Characteristics of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second updating means is
After power failure and power recovery, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value (for example, the display point becomes 0 in the first sub-control unit 400 after power failure and power recovery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter is likely to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When power is restored in the second state, the update amount of the first counter value and the update amount of the second counter value are different (for example, in FIG. 57(a) Step S3105, FIG. 70, FIG. 71),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display a first background in the first state (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 61(d)),
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 61(c)),
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background of the normal state, step S3009 of FIG. 56) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 63) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed in FIG. 63(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 72, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item obtaining effect which is executed after the power is restored and before executing the item use effect, displays the item displayed before the power failure after indicating that the item has been obtained. (For example, in FIG. 72, the item "Medium kill rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during a period from power restoration until execution of the item use effect, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 72, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 72, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 63) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed in FIG. 63(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power is restored. Medium UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is
During the period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect, the item that was displayed before the power failure can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 74, the item acquisition effect is performed before the item use effect Executed, and one of the two "defeat rate UP" items displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
If there are a plurality of items that have not been displayed due to a power outage, this is means for redisplaying the items less than this number once (for example, in FIG. 74, before the power outage One of the two "defeat rate increase" items that were displayed in ) is displayed again),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 74, the item "Medium kill rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during a period from power restoration until execution of the item use effect, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 74, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 74, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 63) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed in FIG. 63(f)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) that indicates the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 72, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 72, the item "Medium kill rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during a period from power restoration until execution of the item use effect, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 72, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 72, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 65 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 65(c) is displayed in FIG. 65(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item not displayed has been obtained during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. Means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 77, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired is "defeat rate? UP", and power is cut off). Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is a means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 77, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect The item acquisition effect indicating that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item is executed, and the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "medium defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from when the item is not displayed due to the restoration of power until the item use effect is executed (for example, 72, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 65 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 65(c) is displayed in FIG. 65(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when the power is restored. ” item and ”Small kill rate UP” item are not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means displays the new items different from the items not displayed during the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is a means capable of executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the number of items obtained is less than the number of items that have not been acquired, and displaying the items (for example, in FIG. 78, "defeat An item acquisition effect that indicates that the item has been acquired is executed, and the "Defeat rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "Medium kill rate UP" item or the "Small kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut. has been added to the Display Items column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays a new item different from the item not being displayed, It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the item use effect has been acquired and display the item (for example, in FIG. 78, before the item use effect, the item use effect is displayed. An item acquisition effect that indicates that you have acquired the target item "Kill Rate? UP" item is executed, and instead of the "Medium Kill Rate UP" and "Small Kill Rate UP" items that were displayed before the power cut, Destruction rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. Items and "defeat rate small UP" items are not displayed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the items that were displayed before the power failure during a period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until the item use effect is executed. (For example, in FIG. 72, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power failure is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 65 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 65(c) is displayed in FIG. 65(d)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) that indicates the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item not displayed has been obtained during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 77, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired is "defeat rate? UP", and power is cut off). Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is a means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 77, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect The item acquisition effect indicating that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item is executed, and the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "medium defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from when the item is not displayed due to the restoration of power until the item use effect is executed (for example, 72, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means may execute an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired or may not execute the item acquisition effect when the storage means stores the acquired item information. Yes (For example, in FIG. 69, the item acquisition effect is executed when a possessed item is added, but in FIG. 80, the item acquisition effect is not executed even if the "defeat 1 body" item is acquired),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed, and the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in Fig. 65(c) is displayed in Fig. 65(d)),
(See (4) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A first updating means (eg, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (eg, cumulative points) in a direction approaching a predetermined value (eg, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
with
The storage means is means for storing the information of the item based on the value of the first counter (for example, when the total points reach 1000 or when the total points are not 0 in a confrontation state, the item ),
The value of the second counter may be the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 69),
The value of the second counter may become different from the value of the first counter after power failure and power recovery (for example, FIG. 70),
The display means is means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, in FIG. 61 etc., the display point is shown at the lower left of the effect image display device 157),
The display means is means for not executing the item acquisition effect in accordance with the value of the second counter when the storage means stores information of the acquired item (for example, FIG. 80 Then, if the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed, the determination in step S3205 of FIG. 58 is No, and step S3207 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means does not perform the item acquisition effect if the value of the second counter does not change after power is restored (for example, in FIG. 80, the display point is 0 after power is restored). The item acquisition effect is not executed until),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means may store the information of the item obtained based on the number of games that have passed (for example, the item may be obtained in the first game of a confrontation state that changes with the number of games that have passed). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is not executed may be more advantageous to the player than the item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is executed (for example, item acquisition A configuration with a difference in the advantage of the item obtained depending on whether the effect is executed or not),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A privilege lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a privilege based on the item stored in the storage means (for example, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for transition to the AT state using the possessed item).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information of the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game table comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 63) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed in FIG. 63(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The timing for displaying a new item includes a first timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game, and a second timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game.
The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
(See (5) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation,
The first timing is a timing after the last stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The second timing is a timing after the timing of the start operation and before the final stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The frequency at which new items are displayed at the first timing is higher than the frequency at which new items are displayed at the second timing;
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the game in which the item use effect is executed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing (for example, FIG. 81).
(See (5) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. item is not in the display item column after power failure),
Before the game in which the item use effect is executed, if the power is cut off and restored while the item is being displayed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing. (for example, FIG. 81),
(See (5) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when the power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 81, before and after the power failure and power no change in information),
The display means is a means for displaying an item that is not displayed due to a power failure and power recovery when displaying a new item at the second timing (for example, FIG. 81).
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number of items newly displayed at the first timing is 1,
The number of items newly displayed at the second timing is 1 or more,
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure (hereinafter referred to as "first item") is stored when the power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, the power failure in FIG. 81). There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first item that was displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 81, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as "second item") has been acquired during the period from when power is restored until the item use effect is executed. Then, after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. Acquiring the item executes the item acquisition effect, but the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 72, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

In the above explanation,
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation,
The display means is
In a period after receiving the start operation and before all the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, the first display (for example, FIG. 82(a1) and FIG. 82(b1)) is displayed. When power failure occurs, after the power is restored, the first display that was displayed before the power failure is displayed (for example, FIG. 82(b)),
In the period in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power failure occurs while the first display is displayed, the first display that was displayed before the power failure after the power is restored is a means for displaying a second display without displaying the display of (for example, FIG. 82(a)),
(See (6) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
In the period before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control after receiving the start operation, if the power is interrupted while the second display is displayed, the power is interrupted after the power is restored. Means for displaying the previously displayed second display (in the event that a power failure occurs during a game, the display after the power is restored matches the display before the power failure);
(See (6) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item) (eg, FIG. 82(a1)),
The second display is a display that does not contain items (for example, FIG. 82(a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including that the points updated based on the progress of the game are values different from the initial values (for example, FIG. 82(a1)),
The second display is a display including that the point is an initial value (for example, FIG. 82 (a2)),
(See (6) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including a background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 82(a1)),
The second display is a display including a background different from the background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 82(a2)),
(See (6) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 63) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 63(e) is displayed in FIG. 63(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 65(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information of an item (hereinafter referred to as "first item") before power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 72, power failure There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first item that was displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 72, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as "second item") has been acquired during the period from when power is restored until the item use effect is executed. and after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. 72, the item acquisition The effect is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 72, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 83 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are adhered to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each of the reels 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-projecting portion and a light-receiving portion. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is predetermined by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is betted, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are betted, three additional horizontal winning lines, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line, will be valid and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three bet game", a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two bet game", and a game in which one medal is inserted. is sometimes referred to as "one bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment functions as a effect device that executes effects (for example, panel attack effect, bonus symbol notification effect, etc.) to be described later.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combination, and stopping of reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The speakers 272 and 277 of this embodiment function as an effect device that executes effects (for example, bonus symbol stop effect) to be described later.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 85(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be called "working hands" to distinguish them from winning hands. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating the internal winning is set (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the bonus internal winning state) is maintained until the next game is played, and the internal winning of BB1 and BB2 is in progress even after the next game. White 7-White 7" and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

The RB game of this embodiment is composed of 8 games, and the RB game ends when the 8 games of the RB game are finished.

"Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", and "bell") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as watermelon or cherry.

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. In addition, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell will also be referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, an effective pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of reel frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 87) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 86 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 88(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 88(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 88(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 88(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 88(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 89(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 89(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 89(d) is a flow chart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 89(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read out in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 89(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 89(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 89(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example L1>
Example L1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 99. FIG. In embodiment L1, a panel attack effect is executed under a certain time limit during eight games of RB. The panel attack effect is an image effect using the effect image display device 157 . More specifically, the panel attack effect is performed by moving the cursor (indicated by C in the drawing) on a grid-like panel (indicated by P in the drawing) provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and moving. When the cursor stops, the panel at the position of the stopped cursor is erased, and the hidden image behind the erased panel is exposed (on the drawing The exposed image is indicated as d1). Among the panel attack effects, the effect that the panel disappears is referred to as a panel erasing effect. The panel attack effect is a effect related to the stop operation, and can be said to include both this panel erase effect and the reel stop effect of stopping the reels 110-112.

FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing the appearance of a panel provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 90(b) shows the movement path of the cursor (indicated by RT on the drawing). It is a diagram. In Example L1, it is composed of 7×7=49 panels, and some of the panels are special panels (panels marked with the letter B, indicated by BP on the drawing). . Hereinafter, the panel on which the letter B is displayed is called a bomb panel, and the other panels are called normal panels. On such a panel, the cursor moves in a horizontal zigzag direction from the upper left corner of the screen to the lower right corner of the screen, as indicated by the movement path.

In addition, in Example L1, 49 panels of 7×7 are used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be more or less than 7×7. For example, the player may be allowed to select the difficulty level, and the number of vertical and horizontal panels may be changed according to the difficulty level. In addition, although the moving speed of the cursor is constant in the embodiment L1, it is not limited to this, and the moving speed may be variable. For example, the moving speed of the cursor may be changed according to the number of remaining RB games, the remaining time limit, and the difficulty level.

In Example L1, when the cursor stops at the position of the normal panel, the region of the stopped panel is erased and the rear image of the panel region is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor stops at the position of the bomb panel, the areas of multiple panels including the stopped panel (for example, the top, bottom, left, and right panels adjacent to the bomb panel) are erased, and the rear image of the multiple panel areas is displayed. be done. FIG. 90(c) is an example of the overall image d10 arranged behind the panel, and the image d1 is an image displayed by partially exposing the overall image d10. The overall image d10 may be, for example, an image that informs the player of advantageous information, or may be an image that suggests setting values, for example. That is, the panel attack effect (panel erasing effect) may be an effect for giving a predetermined privilege to the player.

FIG. 90(d) is a diagram for explaining the image display of the panel erasing effect (hereinafter referred to as "panel erasing effect display"). The panel erasing effect display d20 is a display in which a cloud-like balloon image suddenly displayed on the entire screen in response to the stop operation gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears. As the cloudy image disappears, the image behind is exposed and displayed. The display time of the panel erasing effect display d20 is the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect. The execution time TA in Example L1 is the same regardless of whether the cursor stops at the normal panel position or at the bomb panel position.

Here, in the panel attack effect of embodiment L1, it is possible to stop the cursor a maximum of 24 times (=8G×3) within the time limit. There is a need to. Therefore, the panel attack effect is a effect that requires careful stopping operations.

Further, in the panel attack effect of Example L1, an operation invalid time TB is provided between the first stop operation and the second stop operation and between the second stop operation and the third stop operation. The operation invalid time TB is a period in which the target reel is stopped even if a stop operation is received during this period, but the panel erase effect is not executed based on this stop operation. In the embodiment L1, the operation invalid time TB is the same time as the execution time TA of the panel clear effect. In other words, it is possible to execute the next panel erasing effect after the currently executed panel erasing effect is completed. As a result, the player can clearly see the entire panel erasing effect.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an overview of the panel erasing effect based on the first stop operation when the left reel 110 is used as the first stop reel. FIG. 91(a) shows an overview of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops at the normal panel, one panel at the position where the cursor has stopped is erased, and the image d1 for one panel is displayed. It shows the mode of production in this case. On the other hand, FIG. 91(b) shows a case where the cursor stops at the bomb panel, and not only the panel where the cursor stopped but also the eight adjacent panels, a total of nine panels are erased and the panel It shows a rendering mode when nine images d1 are displayed.

FIG. 92 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation>the operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2>operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are the stop operations after the panel erase effect is completed, the panel erase effect is performed based on each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Execution is started.

Note that the cursor movement display shown in FIG. 92 refers to an image display in which the cursor is moving, and the cursor stop display refers to an image display in which the cursor is stopped (the same applies hereinafter). In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 92, the cursor stop display is performed while the panel erasing effect display is performed, and the cursor movement display is started after the execution time TA (operation invalid time TB) has passed. It has become.

FIG. 93 shows a case where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation<operation invalid time TB. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a panel clear effect based on the first stop operation and the second stop operation in the case. In this case, first, the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation, and the panel erasing effect is also started to be executed. Subsequently, the middle reel 110 is stopped based on the second stop operation, but since the panel elimination effect started based on the first stop operation is still being executed, a new panel elimination effect based on the second stop operation is not executed. Not executed.

As described above, in Example L1, even if there is a stop operation, there is a case where the panel clear effect is not executed. This is for the purpose of clearly showing the panel erasing effect to the player. That is, in the panel attack effect, (1) when both the effect of stopping the reels 110 to 112 and the panel erasing effect are executed based on one stop operation, (2) the reels 110 to 112 are executed based on one stop operation. There is a case where an effect to stop only is executed.

FIG. 94 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation < operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2<operation invalid time TB. In this case, the panel clear effect based on the first stop operation ends at time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from time t0 of the first stop operation. The panel erasing effect based on the 3 stop operation is not executed. Note that the stopped cursor starts to move and display from time t1.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment L1, when the panel erasing effect being executed ends, that is, when the execution time TA (=operation invalid time TB) elapses from the stop operation, the panel erasing effect based on the next stop operation is executed. Apart from this, if a stop operation is performed during the operation invalid time TB, the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset and the operation invalid time TB has elapsed since the time of the stop operation. may be re-measured (Modification 1).

FIG. 95 shows a game in which the panel attack effect of Modification 1 is executed, in which the operation interval time T1<operation invalid time TB between the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and the second stop operation and the second stop operation 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2 between three stop operations<operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in a period in which the operation invalid time TB does not elapse from the previous stop operation, the panel is erased based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation in the game. No performance is performed. In addition, since the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset each time the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed, the cursor movement display is started at the time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from the time t0 of the third stop operation. do.

In Example L1, as shown in FIG. 96(a), the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect and the operation invalidation time TB are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 96(b), execution time TA of panel clear effect<operation invalid time TB may be set, or as shown in FIG. 96(c), execution time TA of panel clear effect>operation invalid time. TB may be used. In the case of FIG. 96(b), it is possible to pay attention to and enjoy the effect after the panel erasing effect is finished. Also, in the case of FIG. 96(c), the user can enjoy the panel erasing effect from the beginning to the middle.

In the embodiment L1, the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect is the same when the cursor stops on the normal panel and when the cursor stops on the bomb panel. Good (Modification 2).

FIG. 97 shows each device when the cursor stops on the normal panel based on the first stop operation and stops on the bomb panel based on the second stop operation in the game executing the panel attack effect of the modification 2. is a timing chart showing the operation of In FIG. 97, the execution time TA1 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the normal panel and the execution time TA2 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the bomb panel are indicated.

For example, execution time TA1<execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 97(a), or execution time TA1>execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 97(b). The panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 97(a) has an execution time that matches the size of the panel area to be erased, so the effect is natural with a sense of unity whether the user stops at the normal panel or the bomb panel. can be realized. On the other hand, in the panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 97(b), the more panel areas to be erased, the shorter the execution time.

In addition, in the panel attack effect of the above embodiment L1, the number of panels to be erased in the panel erasing effect varies depending on whether the cursor is stopped at the normal panel or the bomb panel. You may perform an attack production.

For example, when the cursor moves along the movement path on a grid-like panel as shown in FIG. A benefit that is advantageous to the player who stops the cursor at a closer position may be given. Also, if the cursor is stopped at a position closer to the special bomb panel, an operation response effect with a longer execution time may be executed. In this case, the operation response effect with a long execution time may suggest giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than the operation response effect with a short execution time.

Specifically, the benefits when the cursor is stopped on the panel (denoted as NP on the drawing) one before or one after on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in FIG. It is also a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege when it is stopped at a panel (denoted as FP in the drawing) that is two ahead or two ahead on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in 16 (c). good.

In the above embodiment L1, the panel attack effect is executed in the RB game, but the game in which the panel attack effect is executed is not limited to RB. For example, it may be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a BB game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment L1, the panel clear effect is executed for one operation of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but other operations such as simultaneous operation of multiple buttons and slide operation of multiple buttons are executed. may apply. In this case, for example, the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected first in the simultaneous operation or the slide operation, or the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected later. . In the latter case, a reel stop effect of stopping the reels is executed for the previous operation, and a reel stop effect of stopping the reels and a panel erasing effect are executed for the subsequent operation.

Further, the panel attack effect of Example L1 has been described as an effect on the effect image display device 157 of the slot machine 100, but the target of the panel attack effect is not limited to the slot machine 100. FIG. For example, the panel attack effect shown in FIG. 98 may be applied to a game machine.

FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the panel attack effect executed by the game machine. The panel attack effect shown in FIG. 99 is a effect in which a cursor falling from top to bottom is stopped based on a stop operation, and a better evaluation can be obtained by stopping the cursor at a position closer to a predetermined line TL. be. For example, PERFECT (good evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped on a predetermined line TL, and GOOD (ordinary evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped within a predetermined range R1 near the predetermined line TL. evaluation), and when the cursor is stopped outside the predetermined range R1, an evaluation of BAD (bad evaluation) is given, and an effect according to the evaluation is executed, or a privilege according to the evaluation is given. good.

Also, a panel attack effect may be executed on a pachinko machine equipped with a chance button. For example, the panel attack effect may be executed during 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the panel elimination effect may be executed based on the operation of the chance button. As a rule, for example, the chance button can be operated up to three times in one round, and an operation invalid time is provided between chance button operations. When the chance button is operated after the operation invalid time has elapsed, the panel clear effect is executed based on the operation of the chance button, but the next chance button is operated before the operation invalid time has elapsed. In this case, the panel clear effect may not be executed based on the operation of the chance button.

<Example M1>
Example M1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 104. FIG. In the embodiment M1, in the internal bonus winning state (BB1 and BB2), there is an effect (for example, a symbol combination of the bonus combination) that notifies the symbol of the internally won bonus combination and instructs to align the symbol combination of the internally won bonus combination. , an effect of instructing one symbol among the stop modes including the symbol combination of the bonus combination, hereinafter referred to as a bonus symbol notification effect) may be executed. Then, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is being executed, one symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is stop-displayed on the active line based on the player's first stop operation. In this case, a bonus symbol stop effect indicating that the bonus symbol has stopped on the active line is executed.

FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect is an image display effect, and as shown in FIGS. 100(a) to 100(c), the image d30 showing the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed as the effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. This is an effect displayed on the display device 157 . The bonus pattern stop effect is a voice output effect, and as shown in FIGS. 100(a) to 100(c), the effect of outputting predetermined sounds v1 to v3 congratulating the stopping of the bonus symbols from the speakers 272 and 277. is.

FIG. 100(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the left reel 110, the slot machine 100 outputs the first voice v1 (for example, "I'm sure!~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 100(b) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs the second voice v2 (for example, "I did it!") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 100(c) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the third voice v3 (eg, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the embodiment M1 executes different bonus symbol stop effects in accordance with the reel targeted by the first stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Various performances can be provided to the player in the executed game, and interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB1 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect was executed, when the symbol of BB1 was stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect was executed. A bonus symbol stop effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even when a specific symbol other than the symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 101(a) is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the small winning symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state. In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination in which Watermelon or Cherry is internally won at the same time, so there is a case where Watermelon or Cherry is won in the BB1 internal winning state. Therefore, in the BB1 internal winning state, there is a case where the small winning symbol notification effect is executed. The small winning pattern notification effect is a presentation image display effect for notifying the internally won small winning pattern and instructing to align the small winning pattern combination, and the simultaneously winning small winning pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern). is displayed on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 101(a) shows a case where the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation in a game in which the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed. In this case, the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, but the slot machine 100 does not output the sound of the bonus symbol stop effect from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加That is, in the game in which the BB1 internal winning state of the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, even if the player ignores the content of the notification and stops the BB1 symbol on the effective line for the predetermined reel, the bonus symbol is stopped. No performance is performed.

FIG. 101(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 100(b)) for comparison with FIG. 101(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the effective line for a predetermined reel, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b), in Example M1, even if the symbols of BB1 stop on the activated line on the same predetermined reel, the bonus symbols are displayed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed. Although the stop performance is executed, the bonus symbol stop performance is not executed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification performance is not executed (specifically, the game in which the minor winning symbol notification performance is executed). As a result, it is possible to improve consistency between the symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect, and to increase the reliability of the symbol notification effect.

In the embodiment M1, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed. When the symbol of BB1 stops on the active line, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed with a probability of 100%, but it is not limited to this. In a broad sense, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the probability of executing the bonus symbol notification effect in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed>Bonus in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed It suffices if it is the probability of executing the symbol notification effect.

FIG. 101(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the minor winning symbol notification effect. The image d32 shown in FIG. 101(c) is an image displaying the symbol combination of BB1 together with the symbols of the minor winning combination. In this way, in the small win symbol notification effect, a symbol different from BB1 may be displayed together with the symbol combination of BB1. It may not be executed. That is, in the minor winning symbol notification effect, at least a symbol different from the bonus symbol should be displayed in the displayed effect image.

FIG. 102(a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the overview of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state. Even in the BB2 internal winning state, there is a case where the bonus symbol notification effect is executed in the same way as in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state is an effect of displaying the image d40 showing the symbol combination of BB2 on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 102(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs a second voice v1 (for example, "Ichika!~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus. Execute the pattern stop effect.

FIG. 102(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 100(a)) for comparison with FIG. 102(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the left reel 110 based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 , to execute a bonus symbol stop effect for outputting a second voice v1 (for example, “Ichika!~”) from the speakers 272 and 277.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b). 111), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the activated line, the bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the second sound v1 is executed. For example, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the left reel 110), the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the second sound v1, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for different stop operations, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

FIG. 103(a) is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state.

FIG. 103(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the second sound v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus symbol. Execute the stop effect.

FIG. 103(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 100(c)) for comparison with FIG. 103(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the right reel 112 by the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 operates as a bonus symbol. A symbol stop effect is executed, and a bonus symbol stop effect of outputting a third voice v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 is executed.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b). 112), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the active line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the sound v3 is executed, while the BB1 is on the first reel (for example, the right reel 112) in the BB1 internal winning state. symbol stops on the activated line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting a voice v3, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for the same stop operation, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB2 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and when the BB2 symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. Even when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop performance may be executed at a predetermined rate.

100 to 103 explained the bonus symbol stop effect for the first stop operation, but the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed only for the first stop operation. The bonus symbol stop effect is executed also for the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the bonus symbol stop effect from the first stop operation to the third stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Specifically, in FIG. 22, the stop operation is performed with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed in any stop operation. indicates the case. It should be noted that FIG. 104(a) shows the outline of the effect when the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and FIG. 104(b) shows the effect outline when the minor symbol symbol notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), when the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the sound v2 for the first stop operation (see FIGS. 100(b) and 101(b)). , a bonus pattern stop effect (see FIG. 100 (c)) that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation, and a bonus that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the pattern stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 100(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(b), when the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed for the first stop operation (see FIG. 101(a)), A bonus symbol stop effect that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation (see FIG. 100(c)), and a bonus symbol that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 100(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, even when the symbol combination of BB1 is stopped and displayed with the same stop operation content, when the bonus symbol notification effect and the minor winning symbol notification effect are executed, the first stop operation is performed. There is a difference regarding whether or not the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. However, for the second stop operation and the third stop operation, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

Examples L1 and M1 of the present embodiment have been described above, but the example of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and each example may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the amusement machine (e.g., slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above embodiment (e.g., Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277 , various lamps 336, 420, etc.);
A game machine comprising
When the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, etc.) during execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as the first case), the effect means performs the first Means capable of executing an operation response effect (for example, a panel deletion effect based on the first stop operation) (for example, FIG. 91, FIG. 92, etc.),
In the first case, when a second operation (e.g., second stop operation, etc.) is performed after the first time (e.g., operation invalid time TB, etc.) has elapsed after the first operation is performed (hereinafter , second case), the effect means executes a second operation response effect (for example, a panel erase effect based on the second stop operation) (for example, FIG. 91, FIG. 92, etc.),
In the first case, if the second operation is performed before the first time elapses after the first operation is performed, the second operation response effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 93, Figure 94, etc.),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, the second operation response effect may or may not be executed depending on the second operation timing, but the first operation response effect is reliably executed. , the first operation response performance is prioritized over the second response performance, and the player can firmly confirm it. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

In the above first basic configuration,
The rendering means is means for executing at least part of the first operation response rendering during at least part of the first time (for example, FIG. 92, FIG. 96, etc.),
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first operation response effect at the first time.

The first time may be the same as the execution time of the first operation response effect, the first time may be shorter than the execution time of the first operation response effect, The first time may be longer than the execution time of the first operation response effect.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of changing the execution time of the first operation response effect according to the timing when the operation means receives the first operation (for example, FIG. 97),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, or second preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first operation response effect (for example, FIG. 97),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 97(a)). ,
When the effect means executes the first operation response effect taking the third time (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time and executes the first operation response effect. There is a high possibility that it will be more advantageous to the player than when one operation response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 97 (a), etc.),
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferable configuration, the execution time of the first operation response effect is lengthened, so that the player can concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration above,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The first effect is a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 98 and 99) moves along a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) and the first operation is accepted,
In the third case, the position of the cursor display is the second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.) and the first operation is accepted,
The second position is closer to the target display than the first position,
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, fourth preferred configuration, or fifth preferred configuration,
The rendering means performs a third operation response rendering when a third operation (for example, a third stop operation, etc.) is received after the first time has elapsed from the second operation in the second case. (For example, a panel erasing effect based on the third stop operation, etc.) can be executed,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Means that does not execute the third operation response effect if the third operation is received before
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player firmly confirm the first operation response effect.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Execution of the first operation response effect may be terminated before
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, it is possible to carefully operate the operating means.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game table is a slot machine,
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to slot machines.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to the pachinko machine.
(2) As described above, according to the amusement machine (e.g., slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (e.g., Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, reels 110-112, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336 , 420, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The directing means is
First effect means (for example, first sub-control means 400, second sub-control means 500, effect image display device 158, etc.) capable of executing a first response effect (for example, panel erasing effect, etc.);
Second effect means (for example, main control unit 300, reels 110 to 112, etc.) capable of executing a second response effect (for example, stopping reels 110 to 112);
with
The effect means executes both the first response effect and the second response effect when the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc.). There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the first case),
The effect means is such that the operation means is the second operation (for example, if the first operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation, if the first operation is the second stop operation, the first stop operation, etc.) ) is received, there is a case where only the second response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the second case) (for example, FIG. 94),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, since the response performance can be varied according to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to execute a new performance that has never existed before. can.

In the above second basic configuration,
The effect means, in the first case, when the second operation is performed before a first time (for example, operation invalid time TB) elapses after the first operation is performed A means for the second case,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

In addition, in the above second basic configuration,
The effecting means is means for becoming the first case when the first operation is performed before the first time elapses after the second operation is performed in the second case. is
This is the tenth-1 preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration, when the operation interval between the first operation and the second operation is less than the first time, the first operation and the second Since different response effects can be executed by the operation of , it is possible to provide diverse response effects.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration,
In the first case, the effect means is means for executing at least part of the first response effect in at least part of the first time,
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first response effect at the first time.

In the eleventh preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means are stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The second effect means are the plurality of reels,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferable configuration, the first response effect may or may not be executed in response to the stop operation, but the reels can always be stopped.

In the eleventh preferred configuration or the twelfth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the execution time of the first response effect in accordance with the timing at which the operation means receives the first operation.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, or the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first response effect,
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, the thirteenth preferred configuration, or the fourteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 97(a)),
When the effect means takes the third time to execute the first response effect (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time to execute the first response effect (hereinafter referred to as the third case). is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 97 (a), etc.),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 98 and 99, etc.) moves on a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the first operation is accepted while the display effect is being executed and the position of the cursor display is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.),
The third case is a case where the first operation is received while the cursor display position is a second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.) during execution of the display effect,
The second position is closer to the target display than the first position,
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.
(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
internal winning result determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, production image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game table comprising
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (e.g., an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state);
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The first instruction can stop the first symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (for example, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result is an instruction indicating that
The effect means performs a first symbol stop effect (e.g., " It is a means that can execute voice output such as "I did it",
The effect means, when the notification means executes notification regarding the first instruction, executes the first symbol stop effect more than when the notification means does not execute notification regarding the first instruction. is a means with a high probability of
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, when the first instruction is executed, the probability of executing the first symbol stop effect is higher than when the first instruction is not executed, so the effect consistency can be improved, and a novel production that has not existed in the past can be executed.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the watermelon pattern) in the first state,
The second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display a symbol different from the first symbol combination (for example, a watermelon symbol) corresponding to the first result,
When the notification regarding the first instruction is not executed, including the case where the notification means executes the notification regarding the second instruction (for example, FIG. 101 (b), (c), etc.),
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, no instruction information that is disadvantageous to the player is given.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
The notification means executes notification regarding the second instruction until a stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) is performed on a reel to be stopped last (for example, a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels. do,
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferable configuration, the player can understand that the combination corresponding to the different symbols can be arranged.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
When the certain symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels, the effect means performs a second symbol stop effect (for example, "Let's go!"). such as voice output) is a viable means,
The effect means, when the notification means executes the notification regarding the first instruction and when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction, out of the plurality of reels Means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect on reels other than the first stopped reel (for example, second stop reel, third stop reel) (for example, FIG. 104),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, for example, the pattern stop effect is executed also in the second stop operation and the third stop operation, so the interest can be improved.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
The stop control means is capable of stop-displaying the first symbol combination even when the notification means does not notify the first instruction in the first state (for example, FIG. 101(a), etc.)
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, even if the first instruction is not executed, the first symbol combination can be stop-displayed at one's own will, so the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, or the twentieth preferred configuration,
The probability that the first symbol stop effect is executed when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction is 0.
This is the 20th-1 preferred configuration.
(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
internal winning result determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, production image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); ,
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a second state (e.g., BB2 internal winning state),
The first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means,
the second state is a state in which a second result (for example, BB2) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects the first symbol (eg, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result in the first state. ) is stopped and displayed on the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) of the plurality of reels, means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
The effect means selects a second symbol (eg, BB2 symbol) among the stop modes including the second symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the second result in the second state. ) is stop-displayed on the second reel (for example, the middle reel 111) of the plurality of reels, a means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination or the symbols constituting the second symbol combination are stopped and displayed on different reels to execute the second symbol stop effect. Therefore, it may be possible to specify the result of internal winning by grasping the stop reel in the second symbol stop effect. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

Further, according to the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
internal winning result determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, production image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.); , and
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means,
The effect means selects a first symbol among the stop modes including a first symbol combination (eg, a symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result (eg, BB1) in the first state. means for executing the second symbol stop effect when (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, left reel 110) of the plurality of reels,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is the means to carry out
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, different symbol stop effects are executed according to the reels on which the symbols constituting the first symbol combination are stop-displayed, so that the symbol stop effects are varied according to the stop reels. be able to. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has not existed in the past.

In the fourth basic configuration or the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means generates the second symbol based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation) for stopping a first reel (for example, a first stop reel) of the plurality of reels in the first state. It is a means that can execute the stop production,
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-first preferred configuration, it is possible to grasp that the first result is internally won at the time of the first stop operation.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is a means of carrying out
The effect means stops the third symbol when the second symbol is stop-displayed on the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the second state. is a means of carrying out the performance,
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, the same symbol stop effect is executed for the same reel even if the internal winning results are different, so the symbol stop effect can be shared.

In the twenty-second preferred configuration,
The effect means provides the third symbol stop effect based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, or a third stop operation) for stopping one of the plurality of reels. is a viable means of
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-third preferred configuration, the third symbol stop effect can be executed for any stop operation, so that the sense of anticipation for each stop operation can be improved.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
A notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the effect image display device 157, etc.) is provided,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in the first state,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB2) in the second state,
The first instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result,
The second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the second symbol combination corresponding to the second result.
This is the twenty-fourth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, since an instruction is issued according to the internal winning result, consistency of presentation can be enhanced.

<Other game machines>
In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc., which are used as media.

For example, a pachinko machine consists of "a launching device that shoots game balls into a predetermined game area, a start winning hole configured to allow the game balls fired from the launching device to enter, and a game in which a ball enters the start winning hole. Detecting means for detecting a ball, payout means for paying out a game ball when the detecting means detects the game ball (or awarding means for awarding a value equivalent to the game ball), and predetermined patterns (identification information) are varied. A pachinko machine equipped with a variable display device for displaying, and triggered by the detection of a game ball by a detection means, the variable display device changes the pattern and then stops displaying to announce the transition of the game state. It can be.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 105 to 113. FIG. 105 to 113 are basically used only for the description of this embodiment, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 105 to 113 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 105 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as the production button 132 .

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 (a first upper lamp 142a and a second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 108, etc.) provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 liven up the game. In addition to being a decorative lamp, it may be turned on when performing various notifications to be described later.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 106 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed inside. A case 220 is provided. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external common terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combination, and stopping of reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Error display/overview during reel rotation>
Next, an overview of error display during reel rotation will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 105) includes notification means, and the notification means detects when the second error is detected in the first period. a first error annunciation in which the detected error is not identifiable as the second error, and during a second time period after the first time period, the detected error is the second error; A second error notification that can be identified as an error can be executed.

Here, the "informing means" according to the present invention means means capable of informing, for example, display means capable of informing an error by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 105), , sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 107) capable of announcing errors by sound, and light emitting means (in this example, a first upper part shown in FIG. 108) capable of announcing errors by emitting light. In addition to the lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlight of each reel 110 to 112), and the error notification due to the movement of the movable body. Possible movable means (reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 105 in this example) and the like correspond.

Errors that can occur in slot machines include, for example, door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1-4, medal payout errors 1-3, overflow errors, RAM defects, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is received.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

Further, the “first period” according to the present invention is, for example, the period of one game, and as a specific example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the stop button 137 139 until the reels 110 to 112 stop rotating. In addition, it is preferable that the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period.

Further, the "first error notification" is an error notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. "An error has occurred", "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc.

In addition, the "second error notification" is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error. , "Error code: E3" display and voice), and notifications that suggest the location of the error (e.g., "Please check the medal selector", "Door is open", etc.). do.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 105) includes display means, and the display means can display a first display showing game information, means capable of displaying a first error display, the first error display being a display executed when a second error is detected during the first period, and the display means displaying the first If the second error is detected during the execution of the first display during the period, the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display, the first error display, and the second error display. For example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. Apparatus 157 etc. correspond.

Further, the "first display" according to the present invention is a display showing game information, for example, an operation instruction display (operation navigation) showing information for instructing the operation of the player, or Display of the total number of acquired game media, display of the number of AT sets, display of the initial number of AT games, display of the number of AT additional games, display of the number of times operation navigation has been performed, display of the number of times the player has This includes display of acquired points and items, display of the number of game media paid out, and the like.

Further, the "first error display" according to the present invention is a display executed when the second error is detected in the first period, for example, "an error has occurred", " This applies to displays such as "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc. Even if the first error display is executed, the player can still see the first display. Therefore, display having transparency is preferable.

Further, the "second error display" according to the present invention is a display that is executed when a second error is detected during the first period. For example, a display representing an error name or error code ( For example, displays such as "error in the number of medals passed" and "error code: E3"), and displays suggesting where the error occurred (for example, displays such as "please check the medal selector" and "the door is open"). ) applies, and execution of the second error display makes the first display invisible, preferably the display is non-transmissive (non-transmissive).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 1>
Next, Example 1 of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed.

Here, the "display device" in FIG. 109 is display means capable of announcing errors by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 108), and the "speaker" is capable of announcing errors by sound. Sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 107 in this example), and lamp 1 and lamp 2 are light emitting means (in this example, speaker 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 108) capable of emitting (outputting) light. 1 upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b), which are one of the notification means. Also, the payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 105).

Figure 108 (a) and Figure 109 (a) is a state of receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135 in the AT game.

In the same state, the reception of the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is used as a trigger to start the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 and to execute the AT effect. In the AT effect of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 includes a background display including a character image, etc., and an operation instruction display (first display, first game information) for instructing the player's operation. A display) SD and a total win display (first display, second game information display) GD indicating the total number of medals won by the player are displayed.

Also, from the speaker (sound output means), background sound (BGM) corresponding to the AT production is output, and from the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT production. emit light.

Figures 108(b) and 109(b) show that a medal passing number error (second error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and is within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (second error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed). If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes you can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing the game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the third effect during the first period. Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, operation instruction display Since the player can visually recognize the SD and the total acquired number display GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

FIG. 108(c) and FIG. 109(c) are states in which the second error notification is started with the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (second error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (second error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the second error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second game information display) to be displayed. Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (second error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the error sound is output without outputting the certain sound during the second period, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, By outputting an error sound, the player can call a store clerk at the game parlor to deal with the error.

FIG. 108(d) and FIG. 109(d) show the state in which the medal passing number error (second error) has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In the same state, the AT effect is resumed when the error is resolved. In the AT effect after the restart, the background display and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157, and the speaker (sound output means) is displayed. ) outputs a background sound corresponding to the AT effect, and the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emit light in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT effect. Also, the payout number display 127 displays the number of payout medals (0 in this example) corresponding to the winning combination (Bell in this example).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 2>
Next, a second embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed.

Note that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109 only in the types of errors that occur, so description of other contents will be omitted.

110(b) and 111(b), a medal passing time error (third error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during rotation of the reel and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the medal passing time error), so that the gaming machine is notified of fraudulent activity. If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes you can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) during execution of the third effect in the first period Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a semi-transparent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD Since the player can visually recognize the display of the total number of winnings (GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited due to the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Further, the second error (medal passing time error in this example) is detected while the sound output means (speaker in this example) is outputting a certain sound (background sound in this example) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the occurrence of the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) and the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) can be notified by the common (same mode) first error notification. can improve convenience.

FIG. 110(c) and FIG. 111(c) are states in which the third error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing time error (third error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute the third error notification.

In the third error notification of this example, as the third error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the third error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display). Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the third error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the medal passing time error (third error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a third embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the fourth error occurs in a certain game and the fourth error display is executed, and FIG. is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when error 1 occurs and a fourth error display is executed.

In this example, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only the contents different from those in the first and second embodiments will be explained.

Figures 112(b) and 113(b) show that a medal passing number error (fourth error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (fourth error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the fourth error display, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. , the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the display of the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD become invisible. Further, the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emits light in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, the output of the background sound by the speaker (sound output means) and the light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

FIG. 112(c) and FIG. 113(c) show a state in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (fourth error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (fourth error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (transparent By overlapping and displaying the background image without ), operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD, total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD and the fourth error indication become invisible.

From the fourth error display, which is the first error notification, only the information that "a selector error has occurred" can be obtained, but from the second error display, which is the second error notification, " You can get the information "A medal passing error, which is one of the selector errors, has occurred."

That is, since the second error notification includes error notification with more detailed content than the first error notification, the second error notification provides detailed information about the error (for example, the location of the error, the cause of the error, etc.). , countermeasures, etc.) can be specified, and it is possible to respond appropriately to the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become.

In addition, in this example, the fourth error display and the second error display provide operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second display). Game information display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed after the occurrence of the fourth error until the fourth error is resolved.

According to this example, after the error occurs, the game cannot proceed until the fourth error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. It is possible to call a store clerk and resolve the error.

In addition, in the second error notification, in addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emitting mode, and the speaker (sound output means) outputs an error sound, and the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (fourth error).

According to this example, from the first period to the second period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. From the period to the second period, the player is asked to call the store clerk of the game shop, and the error can be quickly dealt with.

<Error display during reel rotation/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 105 or the pachinko machine) has notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 105 and the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 107). , 277, the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 108, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlight of each reel 110 to 112, FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown in ), wherein the notification means detects a second error (for example, a medal passing number error) during a first period (for example, one game period) When the first error notification (e.g., the first error notification shown in FIG. 108 (b)) can be executed, and the second error notification is performed in the second period after the first period (e.g., second error notification shown in FIG. 108(c)), wherein the first error notification is notification that the detected error is the second error and cannot be specified; The amusement machine is characterized in that the second error notification is a notification capable of specifying that the detected error is the second error.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game can proceed (for example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the reels 110 by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 112 until the rotation stops).

With such a configuration, during the period of one game, an unidentifiable notification is given that the detected error is the second error. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected (for example, ``an error has occurred'', ``anomaly has been detected'', ``please call a staff member'', ``cancel the error''). Please,” may be displayed or voiced.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

Further, the notification means can execute the first error notification when a third error (for example, medal passing time error) is detected during the first period, and after the first period means capable of executing a third error notification during the second period of , and the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, FIG. 110(b)), and the third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, It may be the first error notification shown).

With such a configuration, the occurrence of the second error and the third error can be notified by the common (in the same mode) first error notification, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the reporting means is means including at least display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 105), and the first error reporting means that the detected error is the second error. The first error notification is notification by an unspecified indication that the detected error is the third error, and the second error notification is an indication that the detected error is the third error. The error is reported by a display capable of specifying that the error is the second error, and the third error report is a report by a display capable of specifying that the detected error is the third error. may

With such a configuration, since the first error notification and the second error notification can be performed using the display means, the error can be noticed more reliably through vision.

The notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 107) and light emitting means (for example, first and second upper lamps 142a and 142b, side lamps 144 and a stop button shown in FIG. 108). Illuminators 137a, 138a, 139a of each of 137-139, backlight of each of reels 110-112).

With such a configuration, the error can be more reliably noticed through hearing and sight.

Further, a first effect means capable of executing a first effect (for example, the first upper lamp 142a) is provided, and the first effect means is during the first period during the execution of the first effect. It may be means for continuously executing the first effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, a second effect means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a second upper lamp 142b) is provided, and the second effect means is during the second effect during the first period. It may be means for not executing the second effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, there is a case where a store clerk nearby can notice the occurrence of an error before the player calls the store clerk, and the error can be dealt with quickly.

Further, the notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speaker) is a means capable of executing a third effect, and the notifying means is capable of executing the third effect during the first period. It may be means for continuing to execute the third effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, the notification means is means for not executing the third effect during the second period when the second error is detected while the third effect is being executed during the first period. may

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk of the game parlor by not executing the effect.

Further, when the second error is detected during the second period, the notification means executes the second error notification without going through the execution of the first error notification. may

With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly respond to the error by not performing the first error notification.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 105) includes notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 105, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. The first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in 108, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, and the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), wherein the notifying means detects the first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 108(b)) can be executed, and a second error notification (for example, FIG. 108(c ) is a means capable of executing a second error notification shown in ), the first error notification is a notification that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification The error notification is notification capable of specifying that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk. Further, since the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification, after noticing the occurrence of the error by the first error notification, the error is dealt with according to the second error notification having a large amount of information. and respond quickly and appropriately to errors.

Further, the second error notification may be notification including the first error notification.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

In addition, the second error notification (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error, number of medals passed error" shown in FIG. 112(c)) is the same as the first error notification (for example, More detailed content than the opaque (non-transparent) background image with the character string "selector error" shown in FIG. Identifiable content) may be included in the error notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specify the location of the error by the second error notification, and it is possible to appropriately deal with the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become. Also, the content of the corresponding error can be recognized at the timing when the store clerk of the game shop called by the player checks the game machine.

Further, the notification means executes the first error notification when a fourth error (for example, a door open error) is detected during the first period, and executes the first error notification after the first period. Only the first error notification may be continuously executed during the two periods.

With such a configuration, if the player wants to give priority to time, such as when the store is about to close, it may be possible to continue the game in the case of a minor error.

Further, the player can continue playing the game during the second period after the fourth error is detected during the first period, and the second error is detected during the first period. The player may not be able to continue playing the game during the second period of time.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued with respect to minor errors, and the degree of importance of the error can be notified to the player or the store clerk depending on whether or not the game can be continued. can be done.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 105) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157). First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total number of wins display GD shown in FIGS. 108(a) and 110(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. , and the display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. The game machine is characterized in that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the game is played.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

Note that "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" means that at least a part of the first display is visible. A case in which at least part of one error display overlaps at least part of the first display is also included.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 105) is a game machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157). First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total number of wins display GD shown in FIGS. 108(a) and 110(a), display of set number of AT, display of initial game number of AT, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. , and the display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the error is detected, and the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period. It is a game table characterized by

It should be noted that ``during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved'' means that the first display overlaps the error display, etc. In addition to the case where it is displayed and the game cannot proceed, the case where all the display areas of the display means are overlapped with an error display etc. and the game cannot proceed, or alternatively (or in addition) , when the operation of the operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) becomes invalid and the game cannot proceed, when an error sound is output from the sound output means and the game cannot proceed, or when the light emitting means This also includes the case where light is emitted to indicate an error and the game cannot proceed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error. Also, during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved. It is possible to eliminate the error.

Also, the first display may be invisible during a second period after the first period.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, and the player can call the game parlor clerk during the second period to deal with the error. .

Also, the first period may be a period during which a game can proceed.

With such a configuration, at least the game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the game information may be information that instructs the operation of the player.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued based on the game information, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the first error display is a display having transparency, and the above-mentioned "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" The first error indication may overlap the first indication.

With such a configuration, while the first error notification is displayed in front, the player can visually recognize the first display in the back, so that the player can play the game even under the condition that the error occurs. The game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the display means can display a second error display (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "Error in the number of passed medals" shown in Figs. 108(c) and 110(c)). and the second error display is non-transparent display, and the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. , the second error display is executed without executing the first error display during the second period, and the above-mentioned "the first display becomes invisible" means that the first The display may be overlapped with the second error display.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, the second error display is overlapped before the first display. By doing so, the first display becomes invisible, so that the player can call the store clerk of the game parlor to deal with the error.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) are provided, the sound output means is means capable of outputting a certain sound (for example, background sound), and the sound output means is capable of outputting during the first period When the second error is detected while the certain sound is being output, the certain sound may be continuously output.

With such a configuration, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited by the occurrence of the error. can.

Further, the sound output means is means capable of outputting an error sound, and when the second error is detected while the sound output means is outputting the certain sound during the first period, the The error sound may be output without outputting the certain sound during the second period.

With such a configuration, while the player can continue playing the game during the first period, an error sound is output during the second period, thereby discouraging the player from playing the game parlor. You can call us and deal with the error.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first period" and the "second period" according to the present invention are not limited to consecutive periods. When that has elapsed (eg, after 3 seconds have passed since the reels 110-112 have stopped), a second time period may begin.

In addition, the start timing of the second period is not particularly limited, but when game media are to be paid out, a second error notification is sent before paying out in order to prevent fraudulent payouts by fraudulent players. preferably.

In addition, the "notification indicating that an error has been detected" is not limited to display notification (in this example, the display of "an error has occurred"), notification by sound, notification by light emission, notification by movement of the movable body It may be a notification or the like.

Also, "the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification" means, for example, that there are multiple types of errors classified into multiple categories (insertion error, payout error, winning error, etc.). In this case, in the first error notification, only the error category (e.g., payout error) is notified, and in the second error report, the error category and name (e.g., payout error: medal payout error 1) are notified. case is included.

Also, for example, in the first error notification, only the name of the error (for example, medal payout error 1) is notified, and in the second error report, the error name and cancellation method (for example, medal payout error 1: remove medals , please operate the error release switch).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which the game balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 118. FIG. 114 to 118 are basically used only for the description of this embodiment, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 114 to 118 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 114 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals from a medal payout device (not shown) (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket).

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Refill production / overview>
Next, an overview of the “refill effect” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) provides a first grant effect for granting a privilege, and the first grant effect in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed. A second giving effect (refilling effect) of giving the same kind of privilege as the given privilege can be executed. In addition, in the first giving effect and the second giving effect, it is possible to display the privilege display regarding the privilege given to the player.

Here, the "privilege" according to the present invention means a profit advantageous to the player, such as points, items, bonuses, AT, addition of AT games, mini games, payout of game media (medals), Operation navigation, internal winning of prizes, prize winning, special effects, etc. correspond to this. In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention is a display related to a privilege granted to a player, for example, a display including points, a display including items, and an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of operation means. This includes a display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of executions, a display announcing an AT-additional game, a display announcing the provision of a bonus, and the like.

Examples of the "display including points" include a display including numbers and character strings such as "+10" indicating the number of points given, and a display including numbers and character strings such as "0010/1000" indicating the number of accumulated points. This applies to indications that include In addition, the "display including items" includes, for example, a display including an image showing the given item (for example, an image imitating the appearance of fruits such as bananas, apples, grapes, etc.), and a display including characters indicating the given item. (For example, a display including a character string such as "banana", "apple", "grape", etc.). Further, as the "operation navigation suggesting the operation mode of the operation means", for example, symbols or character strings such as "←", "right center left", "321" suggesting reverse pressing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. For example, "15 times", "●● (* represents 2 times)", etc. Indications including are applicable.

<Refill production / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, Example 1 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (in this example, bananas of the first value).

Here, the point-specific state effect is a progress effect that may progress for each game, and in this example, is continuously executed over a plurality of games (at least 10 games), and This is an effect in which items are always given in the game. In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may not be continuous games (may be discontinuous games), and items may not be awarded in any game. It can be.

FIG. 115(a) is a diagram showing items given in the special point state rendering and the points corresponding to each item.

The item in this example is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of points (values). Also, in this example, there are a plurality of types of groups, and one type of group, "banana", is a group (item) to which points (values) of 10, 20, or 30 are given. Another type of group, “apples,” is a group (item) to which points (values) of 30, 40, or 50 are given. is a group (item) to which either 100, 200 or 300 points (value) are given.

The points (second value) that can be given by the item "grape" in this example are either 100, 200, or 300, and any of the points that can be given by the item "apple" (first points of value greater than 30, 40, or 50, which is the value). Needless to say, the type and number of items (groups) and the type and number of points given by each item (group) are not limited to this example.

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram showing an example of the first imparting effect in the point specializing state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 115(b)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect has been started in an N (N is a positive integer) game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted. .

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display suggesting the number of remaining games for the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “remaining 10G”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0000/1000”) display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 115(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N game.

In this example, N games are started with the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 10 G". It is updated to "Remaining 9G".

Also, since the item (privilege) "banana" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP1 (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a banana) suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player. running

The method of selecting one item from a plurality of types of items is not particularly limited. You can select items.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 115(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ends the N game, so the privilege display suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. SP2 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+10" suggesting that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0000/1000" to "0010/1000".

In addition, in this example, when the number of points acquired by the player reaches 1000, in the performance (judgment performance) for judging whether or not to shift to AT, so that it is easy to shift to AT (If you win the AT lottery, to make it easier).

The method of selecting one point from a plurality of types of points included in the item is not particularly limited. For example, one point may be selected by lottery. A point may be selected based on

FIG. 115(c) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 115(c)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+1 game and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "9 G left"), and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0010/1000"). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 115(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+1 game.

In this example, the N+1 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to proceed. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 9G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+1 game executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item "banana" in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and is given to the player. The privilege display SP1 suggesting the item (privilege) "banana" (in this example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of a banana) is executed.

Note that the effect suggestion display RD is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a display such as "KEEP" or "LOCK" that suggests that the progress effect is not to proceed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 115(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+1 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+1 game is completed with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, the points (privileges) corresponding to the items (privileges) given to the player ) (in this example, a display including a character string “+10” indicating that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0020/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the first grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the first giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the first giving performance to the second giving performance. be able to.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 115(c3′) shows a case where the same item “banana” as in the first imparting effect is imparted in the second imparting effect, but points (30 points) different from those in the first imparting effect are imparted. It is the figure which showed the example of.

In this example, a privilege display SP3 that suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" granted to the player (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that 30 points have been granted) column) is executed, and since 30 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0040/1000".

According to this example, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the second giving effect, so if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low Even so, in the second giving effect, the player can have a feeling of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving effect may be given.

<Refill production / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, Example 2 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (In this example, the second value item "grape" which is higher in value than the first value item "banana") is given.

FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing an example of the first imparting effect in the point specializing state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 116(a)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect has been started in the N+2 game and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “9G left”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0020/1000”). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(a)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+2 game.

In this example, N+2 games are started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 9G". It is updated to "Remaining 8G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "grape" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP4 (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" granted to the player display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(a)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+2 game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ended the N+2 game, so the privilege display suggesting points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. SP5 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0020/1000" to "0120/1000".

FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 116(b)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+3 game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "remaining 8G") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0120/1000") display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+3 game.

In this example, the N+3 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to proceed. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and is left as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+3 game is a game that executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (the item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Therefore, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and the effect given to the player A privilege display SP4 suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a grape) is executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+3 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+3 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP5 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0120/1000" to "0220/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is executed. Therefore, in the game immediately after executing the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased, and the first imparting effect can be changed to the second privilege. The player's desire to play can be maintained over the two giving performances.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 116(c) is a diagram showing an example of the third addition effect (refill effect of refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 116(c)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+4 game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "8G remaining") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0220/1000"). display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+4 game.

In this example, the N+4 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and one game is completed. Since the progress is not made, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the third imparting effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the third imparting effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which the progress effect is not progressed in the third grant effect. It may be configured to advance the progress effect in the refill effect of the effect).

In addition, in the N+4 game, a third grant effect (refill effect of refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game) is performed. Since it is a game to be executed, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string of "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a third giving effect (refill effect of refill effect), A privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of grapes) that suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the effect suggesting display suggesting the third imparting effect and the effect suggesting effect display suggesting the second imparting effect may be different. ), a display including a character string of "Refill! Refill!" may be executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 116(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+4 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+4 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP6 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+300" suggesting that 300 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 300 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0220/1000" to "0520/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the third grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the second grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the second giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the second giving performance to the third giving performance. be able to.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the third giving effect, so even if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low In the third giving performance, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving performance may be given.

<Refill production / summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 114) is a gaming machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157). A first giving effect (for example, FIG. 115 (b) (1) to the same figure that gives any one of the types of benefits (for example, 10 points of the item “banana” shown in FIG. 115 (a)) (b) The first giving effect shown in (3)) can be executed, and the display means displays a privilege related to the privilege given to the player (for example, in FIG. 115 (b) (2) and the privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 115(b)(3)), and the display means is means for displaying the second A second grant effect (for example, FIG. 115 (c) (1) to FIG. 115 (c) that grants the same type of benefit (for example, 10 points for the item “banana”) as the benefit granted in one grant effect It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing (2nd given effect shown in (3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first giving effect is executed, the second giving effect to give the same kind of privilege as the privilege given in the first giving effect can be executed, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's expectation is increased from the first grant effect to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the desire to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 114) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means displays a plurality of types of benefits. 116 (a) (1) to (a) ( 3) is a means capable of executing the first giving effect shown in 3), and the display means is a means for displaying a privilege relating to the privilege given to the player (for example, a privilege display SP4 shown in FIG. 116(a)(2)). , privilege display SP5 shown in FIG. 116(a)(3)), and the privilege is a first type of privilege that is a first value (for example, an item shown in FIG. 115(a) 10 points of "banana") and a second type of privilege that is a second value greater than the first value (for example, 100 points of the item "grape" shown in FIG. 115 (a)), The display means provides the same type of privilege (for example, 100 points of the item “grape”) as the privilege given in the first giving effect in the game subsequent to the game in which the first giving effect is executed. 116 (b) (1) to (b) (3), which is a means capable of executing the second grant performance (for example, the second grant performance shown in FIG. 116 (b) (3)). be.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second benefit of the same type as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is granted. can be executed, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed. It is possible to keep the player's willingness to play from the provision performance of 1 to the second provision performance.

In addition, the display means, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the privilege of the same type as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect (for example, 300 points of the item "grape") 116(c)(1) to FIG. 116(c)(3)).

With such a configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the third imparting effect of imparting the same type of privilege as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect can be executed. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the execution of the second giving effect, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's willingness to play is increased from the second giving effect to the third giving effect. can be sustained.

Further, the first giving effect may be an effect that always gives the privilege.

With such a configuration, the player will not be discouraged even if the second imparting effect is executed after the first imparting effect.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing a progress effect that may progress for each game (for example, a point specialization state effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 116), and the second imparting effect is executed. In the game, the progress effect may not progress.

With such a configuration, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the chances of granting the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so the second grant effect is executed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing the second giving effect in the next game when the power is restored before the game next to the game in which the first giving effect was executed is started. may be

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has started a game when the amusement arcade opens.

Further, the privilege is composed of a group (for example, item "banana", "apple", or "grape") consisting of a plurality of types of values (for example, three types of points), and the above-mentioned "first The "same type as the privilege given in the giving effect" may refer to one type of group selected again from among the plurality of types of groups.

With such a configuration, even when the value of the privilege given in the first giving performance is low, the second giving performance gives a privilege with a greater value than the first giving performance. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Moreover, said 2nd provision production|presentation may be production|presentation which provides the said privilege of the same value (for example, point) as the said privilege provided by said 1st provision production|presentation.

With such a configuration, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is given even in the second giving performance, so that the player can be given a sense of security and the player's willingness to play can be reduced. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, the privilege may include points, and the privilege display may be a display including the points (for example, privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 115(b)(3)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first giving effect, the player's expectation for re-giving points can be increased, and the first giving effect can be changed to the second giving effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, the privilege may include an item, and the privilege display may be a display including the item (for example, privilege display SP1 shown in FIG. 115(b)(2)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first grant effect, the player's expectation for re-delivery of the item can be heightened, and the first grant effect can be changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, an operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 114) is provided, the privilege includes operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means, and the privilege display indicates the number of times the operation navigation is executed. The display may include the number of operation instructions to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the operation navigation can be increased, and from the first imparting effect to the second imparting effect, It is possible to keep the player's desire to play.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "privileges" according to the present invention are not limited to items or points, and include, for example, bonuses, ATs, AT game additions, mini games, game media (medal) payouts, operation navigation, inside prizes Winning, winning a prize, special performance, or the like may be used.

In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention may be a display related to benefits, such as a display that foretells that a privilege will be granted, or a false notice that a privilege will be granted (a false notice that does not actually grant a privilege). Alternatively, it may be a display (tutorial display) or the like that explains the content of the privilege.

In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to a point-specific effect, and may be, for example, a game section effect in which the number of AT-added games can be obtained, or a special winning role can be won. It may be a production of a game section or the like.

Also, the "value" according to the present invention is not limited to points, and may be, for example, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous state, the number of game media paid out, the winning percentage of mini games, and the like.

<Disbursement after power failure / summary>
Next, an overview of “payout after power failure and power recovery” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

A gaming machine (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment includes payout means capable of executing payout of game media, and sound output means capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the game media. Further, the payout means is capable of executing the rest of the payout when power is restored during execution of the payout of game media, and the sound output means is capable of executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. is configured so as not to output the payout sound. Further, the sound output means is capable of outputting a background sound, and is configured not to output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means.

Here, the ``payout means'' according to the present invention is a means capable of paying out game media (for example, medals). Apparatus, etc. fall under this category. Also, the 'sound output means' is a means capable of outputting sound such as payout sound and background sound, and corresponds to, for example, a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 114, a musical instrument, and the like.

The “payout sound” corresponds to, for example, a sound effect such as “charin” that is output in accordance with the payout of game media, or a voice such as “medals are being paid out”. Also, the "background sound" corresponds to, for example, BGM that is output together with effects using lamps or the like, effect sounds for livening up the game, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes display means capable of displaying a return display after power is turned on, and a period during which the return display is displayed by the display means is a silent period during which no sound is output by the sound output means. , the payout means executes the remainder of the payout during the silent period.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is means capable of displaying a return display after power-on, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 or the like. Further, the "recovery display" according to the present invention is a display suggesting that it is a period (recovering) from after power is restored to the slot machine to when the normal game can be started. This includes a display including character strings such as "medium" and "please wait for a while", and a display in which the entire display area is set to a certain color (for example, black or white).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes payout display means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. Execute the display of the number of payouts.

Here, the ``payout display means'' according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out, for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. . Note that the payout display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be other display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

<Payment after power failure / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, Example 1 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine.

Here, the "display device" in the figure is display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157), the "speaker" is sound output means, and the lamp is light output means capable of outputting light ( In this example, it is a side lamp (decorative lamp) 144) shown in FIG. The payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 114), and the payout device is payout means (payout device not shown in this example).

Before the power interruption shown in FIG. 117(b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the payment button 134 is pressed, a background display is displayed on the display device, a background sound is output from the speaker, and light is output from the lamp in a normal light emission mode. Further, since 50 medals are stored, the figure 50 is displayed on the payout number display, and since no medals are being paid out, the state of the payout device is non-payout.

The state shown in FIG. 117(a) is a state in which a pressing operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted during a game, and payout of betted medals is started. This state may be a state in which a winning combination is won in a certain game, a third stop operation is accepted, and payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is started.

In this example, the state of the payout device is changed from the non-payout state to the payout state when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, and the payout device starts to pay out the medals, and the payout device also pays out the medals. During the period, a sound to be played (for example, a sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

In addition, the number of payout display device displays the number by subtracting 1 in the order of 50→49→48→47→... each time one medal is paid out by the payout device.

It should be noted that the background display by the display device, the background sound output by the speaker, and the light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp are all continued during the medal payout period.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 117(b) is a state in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which power supply to the slot machine 100 is cut off).

In this state, since the power supply to various devices is stopped, background display by the display device, background sound output by the speaker, light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, payout number display by the payout number indicator, and payout The payout of medals by the device is not executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 117(c) is a state in which power has been restored (a state in which power supply to the slot machine 100 has been resumed).

In this example, when the power is restored, the return display is started on the display device, and the display period of the return display is a silent period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, during this silent period, the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 46 medals) is executed by the payout device, and the number of payout display is displayed each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. , 46->45->...3->2->1. After the payout of all medals is completed, the state of the payout device is changed from the payout state to the non-payout state, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number 0 is displayed on the payout number display.

According to this example, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound and the background sound, it is possible to check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. To easily confirm whether or not a player is wrong by an operation sound, and to prevent a fraudulent act by allowing a store clerk of a game parlor to notice the occurrence of fraudulent payout by a fraudulent person during business hours. becomes possible.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the payout number indicator, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

In addition, as in the case of a power failure and power recovery, even after the power is turned on, the operating sound of the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 117(d) is a state in which the game can be started after power is restored.

In this example, when it becomes possible to start a game after the power is restored, instead of the return display by the display device, the background display before the power failure is resumed, the background sound is output by the speaker, and the normal sound is generated by the lamp. By restarting the output of the light in the light emitting mode, the state before the power failure is restored.

<Payment after power failure / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, Example 2 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. The states shown in FIGS. 117(a) to 117(c) are the same as those shown in FIGS.

In this example, in addition to the contents of the first embodiment described using FIG. device) may output an error sound during the remaining execution of the payout.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number or more of medals are delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

The state shown in FIG. 118(e) is a state in which an error is detected during recovery display after power recovery.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during recovery display after power restoration, instead of recovery display, an error display is performed on the display device, an error sound is output from the speaker, and a lamp is displayed. is outputting light in an error light emission mode.

Even when an error is detected, the payout of medals by the payout device and the display of the number of payouts by the payout number display are both continued.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display that notifies the contents of the error by a character string (for example, a character string such as "Door open error occurred!", "Hopper empty error occurred!" error display), error display prompting error resolution (for example, display including a character string such as "Please call a clerk"), and error display showing an error with a still image or video.

In addition, the form of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited. This includes an error sound (for example, a voice or warning sound such as "Please call the store clerk") that prompts to eliminate the problem.

In addition, the error light emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited. , the lighting of an error-dedicated lamp, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout means not accompanied by the payout sound overlaps with the output timing of the error sound, so that the game store clerk more reliably notices that the fraudulent payout has occurred. becomes possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 118(f) is a state in which the cause of the error has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light in the error light emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the recovery display is resumed on the display device.

<Disbursement/summary after power failure/recovery>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 114) according to the present embodiment includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out game media (for example, medals), A game machine provided with sound output means (e.g., a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, wherein the payout means is powered off and restored during the payout of the game medium. the sound output means does not output the payout sound while the payout means is executing the rest of the payout (while the payout means is operating) The gaming machine is characterized by means for not outputting an audio signal of sound, or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of payout sound while outputting the audio signal.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 114) includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of executing payout of game media (for example, medals), and a game medium payout unit. and a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during a period, wherein the payout means is during the payout of the game medium. means for executing the rest of the payout in the event of a power failure and power recovery, and the sound output means outputs the payout sound while the rest of the payout is being performed by the payout means (while the payout means is operating). Means that does not output (for example, does not output the sound signal of the payout sound, temporarily blocks (mutes) the sound signal while outputting the sound signal), and the sound output means is an error (for example, , a door open error for informing the opening of the door of the game table, and a hopper empty error for payout), and the sound output means is capable of outputting an error sound for announcing the payout by the payout means during the rest of the payout. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for outputting the error sound.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to In addition, by overlapping the output timing of the error sound with the operation sound of the payout means that is not accompanied by the payout sound, it is possible for the store clerk to more reliably notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred. Become.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting background sound (for example, BGM), and the sound output means does not output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example, Means for not outputting the audio signal of the background sound or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of the background sound while outputting the audio signal of the background sound may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without background sound, so that the staff of the game parlor can check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that an illegal payout has been made by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. It becomes possible.

Further, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a return display after power-on is provided, and during the display period of the return display by the display means, no sound is output by the sound output means (for example, no sound is output). a silent period (for example, the silent period shown in FIGS. 117 and 118) in which no audio signal is output, the audio signal is temporarily cut off (muted) while the audio signal is output, and the payout means , means for executing the remainder of said payout in said silent period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means in a silent state after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is in operation by the operation sound.

Further, a payout display means (e.g., a payout number display device) capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out is provided, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means for executing the display of the number of payouts.

With such a configuration, the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed, so the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

Further, the error may be a door open error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, even if power is restored by a fraudulent person during business hours, the door open error sound may alert the store clerk of the fraudulent act.

Also, the error may be a payout error related to the payout.

With such a configuration, the store clerk can check both the operation of payout and the operation of error detection outside business hours, thereby enhancing convenience.

Further, a main control section and a sub-control section may be provided, the main control section may control the payout means and the payout display means, and the sub-control section may control the display means. good.

With such a configuration, when the recovery time of the main control unit is earlier than that of the sub-control unit after power failure or after power is turned on, the payout of game media and the display of the number of payouts can be started with priority. is possible, the game media can be paid out quickly, and the convenience can be improved.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, errors that can be notified by the sound output means are not limited to door open errors and hopper empty errors, but medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, and the like. It can be. Also, the payout error related to payout is not limited to the hopper empty error, and may be, for example, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, or the like.

Further, the "silent period" according to the present invention may be a period in which no sound is output by the sound output means. It may be a period during which it is cut off (muted).

Further, the "payout number display" according to the present invention is not limited to subtraction display (eg 50→49→...), and may be addition display (eg 1→2→...).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which the game balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Overall composition>
FIG. 119 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 100 starts a game by inserting medals, and pays out medals according to the result of the game.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 119 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 119) are housed in the center of the main body 101. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the gap. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When the book becomes valid and 3 medals are bet, the 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line become valid as the winning lines. The number of winning lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, ie, the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the relationship between the nine display areas 1 to 9 of the symbol display window 113 and the above five pay lines. In this embodiment, an upper horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L2) composed of display areas 1, 4, and 7, a middle horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L1) composed of display areas 2, 5, and 8 are displayed. A lower horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L3) composed of areas 3, 6, and 9, a rising winning line (diagonal winning line L4) composed of display areas 3, 5, and 7, display areas 1, 5, 9 (diagonal pay line L5).

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the insert medal button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three, two medals are inserted when the insert medal button 131 is depressed, and three medals are inserted when the insert medal button 132 is depressed. It is designed to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 132 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by means of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. is. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the medal insertion buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Light emitters 137a to 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a to 139a are turned on to notify the player. . In other words, the light emitters 137a to 139a inform that the stop buttons 137 to 139 are in a state in which a stop operation can be accepted, in other words, that the rotation of each reel can be stopped. It is. Each of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, an LED, and has a plurality of light emission modes (for example, blinking, turning off, light emission in a first color, light emission in a second color, light emission while continuously changing the color, etc.). ).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the player's side.

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.
<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .
<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combination, and stopping of reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupt is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit 332 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main process described later) when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 332 .

In addition, the basic circuit 302 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (a medal insertion button 130 sensor, a medal insertion button 131 sensor, a medal insertion button 132 sensor, a medal insertion port 141 sensor) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for inserted medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, an adjustment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A medal insertion button 130 sensor, a medal insertion button 131 sensor, and a medal insertion button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into a game. Detects the submit operation when submitting as The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through them. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero, and can calculate the stop position of the reel.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 338 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .
<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are provided to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. is connected.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157, the shutter 163, and the like. The second sub-controller 500 may be composed of a plurality of controllers, such as a controller that controls the effect image display device 157 and a controller that controls the shutter 163 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A drive circuit 530 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the second sub-control section 500, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 530 via an output interface. This drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 504 .

A sensor circuit 532 is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a shutter sensor 538 is connected to the sensor circuit 532 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 every interrupt time.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .
<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 122(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

Each of the reels 110 to 112 has a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) of symbols in a predetermined number of frames (in this embodiment, 21 frames with symbol number counter numbers 0 to 20). As for the number counter, only the number counter will be described in detail later). Numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of FIG. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a BB symbol, the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a replay symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a bell symbol. ing.

When the symbol combination stop-displayed on the activated line becomes the symbol combination of the predetermined winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination wins. Winning hands in the present embodiment include a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, an actuating combination, that is, a big bonus that transitions to a bonus game, and a replayable combination without inserting new medals. It also includes replays that are different roles. In other words, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. including winning a prize. The winning combination will be described in detail below.
<Types of winning roles>
FIG. 122(b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB) is a combination that transitions to a bonus game, and the replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3) can be replayed without inserting new medals. Such a winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from a winning combination, but the "winning combination" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus and a replay, which are working combinations. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning and winning for replay are included.

Winning combinations in this embodiment include a big bonus (BB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted. For example, a regular bonus may be provided separately from the big bonus. Alternatively, AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) may be used without providing a big bonus or a regular bonus.

"Big bonus (BB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is BB "7-7-7". Also, the flag is carried over for BB. That is, when the BB is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). is maintained (BB internal winning state), the BB is internally winning even after the next game, and the symbol combination "7-7-7" corresponding to the BB is complete to win the BB. It is in.

"Small wins (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The symbol combinations are "bell-bell-bell" for bell, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. 122(b). In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 should be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out.

The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay (normal replay)" for replay role 1 (replay), and "replay-replay-bell (high probability replay entry replay)" for replay role 2 (replay 2). )”, and the replay combination 3 (replay 3) is “replay-bell-replay (high probability replay puncture replay)”. If replay 2 is won in the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay (replay role) shifts to a high probability state (replay high probability state), but if replay 3 is won in the replay high probability state. If you put it away, it will return to the normal game state.
<Reel rotating device>
Next, the reel rotating device 10 for rotating the reels 110 to 112 of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. FIG. 123 is an external perspective view showing the reel rotating device 10 of the slot machine 100. The reel rotating device 10 is generally composed of reel drive units 20 to 40 and a case member 12 for housing them. The reel drive units 20 to 40 are structurally made up of the same parts, with the only difference being the pattern arrangement (see FIG. 122(a)) printed on the reel band 610 (see FIG. 124). there is Each of the reel drive units 20 to 40 (because of the same configuration, the reel drive unit 20 will be described below) is detachably housed in the case member 12 individually.

124 is an exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 20. FIG. Also, FIG. 125(a) is a schematic side view showing the state in which the reel drive unit 20 is assembled, and FIG. 125(b) is a schematic front view thereof. In addition, in FIGS. 125(a) and (b), illustration of some members is omitted for convenience of explanation. The reel drive unit 20 has a structure for moving and displaying symbols, and includes a reel 110, a drive device 604 for rotationally driving the reel 110, a rotation detection device 606 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and an inside of the reel 110. and a reel illumination device 608 for illuminating the symbols applied to each reel 110 from the reel lighting device 608 .

The reel 110 includes a thin cylindrical reel band 610, a first reel frame 612 attached to the left side of the reel band 610 and supporting the left side of the reel band 610, and the right side of the reel band 610. It is composed of a second reel frame 614 that supports the right side surface of the reel band 610 .

The first reel frame 612 includes an annular frame portion 612A, six support portions 612B extending from the frame portion 612A toward the center of the frame portion 612A, and these six support portions 612B. It is composed of a cylindrical mounting portion 612C projecting toward the driving device 604 with the distal end of the portion 612B as the base end.

A plate-shaped light blocking piece 612D is formed on one of the six supporting portions 612B so as to protrude toward the rotation detection device 606. The light shielding piece 612D is configured to pass through. The cylindrical mounting portion 612C is formed with four engagement recesses at approximately equal intervals (in this example, at intervals of about 90 degrees) at four locations in the circumferential direction. The four engaging concave portions are fitted to the four engaging convex portions of the movable gear 620 respectively, whereby the first reel frame 612 is engaged and fixed to the movable gear 620 .

The second reel frame 614 is made of an annular member having substantially the same diameter as the frame portion 612A of the first reel frame 612, and is arranged on the opposite side of the first reel frame 612 with the reel belt 610 interposed therebetween.

The drive device 604 includes a drive motor 616, a drive gear 618 attached to a motor shaft 616A of the drive motor 616, a movable gear 620 meshing with the drive gear 618, a support member 623 and a washer. It is composed of a pedestal 622 rotatably supported via 621 . The drive motor 616 and the pedestal 622 are fixedly supported by a plate-like metal frame 626 with a plurality of mounting screws 624 .

In this embodiment, the drive motor 616 is composed of a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor 700 (details will be described later). Movable gear 620 is composed of a gear having a larger diameter than driving gear 618 , and movable gear 620 and driving gear 618 constitute a gear set. Further, as described above, the movable gear 620 is fixed to the first reel frame 612 by using the mounting screw 624 and the washer 621 after being engaged with the mounting portion 612C of the first reel frame 612. It is rotatably supported by 622 and has a structure capable of rotating together with the first reel frame 612 .

The rotation detection device 606 is composed of an optical index sensor 606A consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion, and a mounting base 606B to which the index sensor 606A is attached. , the light blocking piece 612D provided on the first reel frame 612 passes through (see FIG. 125(b)). The mounting base 606B is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 100 determines the positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 in the rotational direction based on the detection result of the rotation detection device 606, and rotates the reels 110 to 112 so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line 114. 112 is stopped. That is, when the index sensor 606A detects the light shielding piece 612D of the rotating reel 110, the main control unit 300 resets the reel rotation position information to zero and can control the reel stop position.

The reel lighting device 608 includes a lighting substrate 608B having one cold cathode tube arranged in the center, and a guide for guiding the light emitted from the cold cathode tube in a predetermined direction with the lighting substrate 608B attached. It is composed of a lighting case 608C including a light plate and a back cover 608A covering the back of the lighting board 608B. The lighting case 608C is fixed to the metal frame 626 with the mounting screws 624 with the lighting board 608B and the back cover 608A attached.
<Stepping motor>
126 is an exploded perspective view of stepping motor 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the stepping motor 700 includes a motor shaft 710, a case member 720 that supports the motor shaft 710, a first bearing 722 that is disposed on the case member 720 and supports the motor shaft 710, and a second bearing 722 that supports the motor shaft 710. , a stator 730 made of an electromagnet that is disposed inside and fixed to the case member 720 , and a rotor 740 that is rotatably attached to the motor shaft 710 . The stepping motor 700 of this embodiment is a PM (Permanent Magnet) type stepping motor, and is configured to make one rotation in 96 steps of a 1-2 phase excitation type. In this embodiment, since the gear ratio between the reel and the motor is 1:5.25, the reel rotates once in 504 steps (=5.25×96).

The motor shaft 710 is a shaft to which a drive gear 618 shown in FIGS. 124 and 125 is attached and which outputs power. Hereinafter, the end of the motor shaft 710 to which the driving gear 618 is attached is called the output end 710A, and the opposite end is called the rear end 710B.

The case member 720 is a bottomed hollow cylindrical body comprising a substantially cylindrical base portion 720A with one end open and a lid portion 720B arranged to close the opening of the base portion 720A. Case member 720 accommodates stator 730 and rotor 740 inside, and supports motor shaft 710 penetrating from the bottom of base portion 720A to lid portion 720B via first bearing 722 and second bearing 724. ing. Further, the base portion 720A is provided with a fixing member 720C having a hole through which a mounting screw 624 is inserted for fixing and supporting a metal frame 626 shown in FIG.

The first bearing 722 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed substantially in the center of the lid portion 720B of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 in the vicinity of the output end 710A.

The second bearing 724 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed substantially in the center of the bottom of the base portion 720A of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the rear end 710B.

The stator 730 is arranged so as to surround the rotor 740, and is wound with drive coils (phase A and phase B) in two upper and lower stages. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the magnetic pole teeth form a triangle (the upward direction is called A phase and B phase, and the downward direction is called A-phase and B-phase. A phase relationship of 90 degrees, A phase and A-phase and B phase and B-phase have a phase relationship of 180 degrees in electrical angle), each magnetic pole (A phase, A-phase, B phase, B-phase) has 12 turns They are teeth. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the magnetic poles of stator 730. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 127, the magnetic poles are circumferentially arranged clockwise in the order of A-phase, B-phase, A-phase, and B-phase.

In this embodiment, the rotor 740 is composed of permanent magnets and has 24 magnetic poles.

Here, the principle of operation of stepping motor 700 will be described. The stepping motor 700 rotates the rotor 740 by passing current through the coils wound around the stator 730 to sequentially magnetize each phase of the stator 730 based on an excitation pattern described later, and attracting the rotor 740 with magnetic force. is configured as

In the 1-2 phase excitation type, the four phases of the stator 730 described above are, for example, A phase (1 phase excitation) → A phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as AB phase. 2 phase excitation) → B phase (1 phase excitation). ) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase, 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase, 2-phase excitation) → B-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → . Rotor 740 is rotated in a fixed direction.

More specifically, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal (for example, a high-level signal) to the phase that excites the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700 via the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. At the same time, a predetermined phase is excited by outputting an off-level pulse signal (for example, a low level signal) to the phase not to be excited. Thereby, the rotor 740 of the stepping motor 700 is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step). For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal to the A-phase of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700, and simultaneously outputs an off-level pulse signal to the B-phase, A-phase, and B-phase. , the rotor is rotated by one pulse (one step) by exciting only the A phase, and thereafter, the rotor is rotated by a predetermined pulse by switching the excitation in the order described above. In addition, A phase → AB phase → B phase → AB phase → A- phase → AB- phase → B- phase → AB- phase (or A phase → AB- phase → B- phase → AB- A rotation for 8 pulses (8 steps) of phase→A-phase→AB phase→B phase→AB phase) is hereinafter referred to as one cycle.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (rotate 360 degrees) is set to 504 pulses (504 pulses/8 pulses=63 cycles). Therefore, the rotation angle of rotor 740 per pulse is approximately 0.71428 degrees (=360/504).

The number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reel once (rotate 360 degrees) is 504 steps, and as described with reference to FIG. are arranged, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21=24 steps.
<Excitation table>
Drive signals output from the CPU 304 to the drive circuit 322 are stored in the ROM 306 as an excitation table. The CPU 304 outputs the instructed drive signal by referring to this excitation table. FIG. 128 is a table showing the contents of the excitation table of this embodiment. The data of each excitation table (data for controlling the rotation of the reel, so it is also referred to as rotation control data) consists of six bit data (specifically, AI0, AI1, A-Phase, BI0 , B-I1, B-Phase) are combined to represent the phase to be excited and the excitation force. Specifically, the combination of A-I0 and A-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the A-phase or A-phase coil, where A-I0 is 0 and A- 0% if I1 is 0, 20% if A-I0 is 1, A-I1 is 0, 60% if A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, A-I0 is When A-Phase is 1 and AI1 is 1, it indicates 100%, when A-Phase is 1, it indicates A-phase excitation, and when it is 0, it indicates A-phase excitation. Similarly, the combination of B-I0 and B-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the B-phase or B-phase coil, where B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 0% if B-I0 is 1, B-I1 is 0 then 20%, if B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 1 then 60%, B-I0 is 1 , B-I1 of 1 indicates 100%, B-Phase of 1 indicates B-phase excitation, and B-Phase of 0 indicates B-phase excitation.

For example, in the excitation table "55H" with the table number "B0", A-I0 is 1, AI1 is 0, A-Phase is 1, BI0 is 1, BI1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 1, it indicates that the AB phase is excited at 20%. In the excitation table "26H" with the table number "C2", A-I0 is 0, AI1 is 1, A-Phase is 1, BI0 is 0, BI1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 0, it indicates that the A-phase is excited at 60% (the B-phase is not excited because it is 0%). Therefore, when the table numbers are switched in the order of "C0"→"C1"→"C2"→"C3"→"C4"→"C5"→"C6"→"C7", AB phase→A phase→ Each phase is excited 60% in the order of AB-phase, B-phase, AB-phase, A-phase, AB phase, and B phase, and the rotor 740 can be rotated by an angle corresponding to one cycle. can. As described above, in this embodiment, the rotation of the reel is controlled by outputting the 6-bit excitation table data (rotation control data) as the drive signal to the drive circuit 322 . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, an excitation force of 0% is also expressed as no excitation, an excitation force of 20% as weak excitation, an excitation force of 60% as medium excitation, and an excitation force of 100% as strong excitation.
<Rotation control table>
FIG. 129 is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of this embodiment. The rotation control table is stored on the ROM 306, and stores the contents of rotation control for each reel control status (specifically, composed of general-purpose offset counter values, excitation tables, and holding parameters). The reel control status is information about the control state of the reels stored independently for each of the reels 110 to 112, and is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a stopped state. "stop control state (stop control in progress)", "acceleration state (acceleration control in progress)" which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in an accelerated state, and "accelerating state (in acceleration control)", when each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a constant speed state. "constant speed state (under constant speed control)" which is information indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are in the retracted state, "retracted state (under retraction control)" which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in the retracted state. Information indicating that each reel 112 is in a braking state "braking state (under brake control)", information indicating that each reel 110 to 112 is in a reel effect (details will be described later) " Any information of "reel effect control in progress" is stored. In this embodiment, the constant speed state is further classified into two states with different excitation forces: a "constant speed 1 state (under constant speed 1 control)" set immediately after the acceleration state and a constant speed 1 state ( There is a "constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control in progress)" which is set immediately after "constant speed 1 control in progress". The constant speed 1 state is provided to stably rotate the reels 110 to 112 and to save power, and the constant speed 2 state is to weaken the excitation force and suppress the heat generation of the reels 110 to 112. is provided in The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment changes the reel control status from stop control→acceleration control→constant speed 1 control→constant speed 2 control→pull-in control→brake control→stop control. Rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 is performed by selecting an excitation table (rotation control data) corresponding to each reel status.

For example, when the reel control status is "under acceleration control", as shown in FIG. , the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "12" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set to " 3" holding time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "30H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "3" is changed to "3" holding time... and so on from the top row to the bottom row of the table. set the data. The reels 110 to 112 are accelerated by gradually decreasing the holding time of the rotation control data that is set in sequence.

The general-purpose offset counter value is a number indicating the order in which each rotation control data is executed in each reel control status (0 origin), and is a cyclic value returning to 0 after 7. A holding time (holding parameter) indicates a time for holding set rotation control data, and one holding time indicates one interrupt time (for example, 1.49 ms). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129, during "acceleration control" in this embodiment, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed, requiring 89.4 ms (=1.49×60). is configured as

When the reel control status is "constant speed 1 control", as shown in FIG. Next, the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" retention time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2". "1" holding time, . In other words, the reels are stably rotated at a constant speed by executing 16 sets of rotation control data that are sequentially set by switching them in one holding time. As a result, the "during constant speed 1 control" of this embodiment is configured to require 190.72 ms (=1.49×8×16 sets) for 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation). ing. During the constant speed 1 control described above, the control pattern such as one set of rotation control data is always repeated a predetermined number of times.

When the reel control status is "constant speed 2 control", as shown in FIG. Next, the rotation control data of the excitation table "06H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" retention time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "26H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2". is "1" holding time, . In other words, the reels are rotated at a constant speed by switching the rotation control data that are sequentially set every holding time. As a result, in the "constant speed 2 control" of the present embodiment, the 1-2 phase 60% excitation (medium excitation) state is continued until a stop operation is performed in the stop possible state, which will be described later in detail. It is In the constant speed 2 control described above, a control pattern such as rotation control data with a general-purpose offset counter value of "0" to "7" is repeated an indefinite number of times. Even if there is, the constant speed 2 control is terminated.

Further, when the reel control status is "pull-in control", the rotation control data used in "constant speed 2 control" are successively set. For example, in "constant speed 2 control", after setting the rotation control data of the excitation table "42H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "5" to "1" holding time, transitioning to "pull-in control" , the rotation control data of the excitation table "62H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "6" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "64H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "7". is set to "1" holding time, the number of steps corresponding to the number of pull-in frames (number of pull-in frames × 24), and the rotation control data of each excitation table corresponding to the general offset counter value of 0 to 7 are set to "1" holding time The setting is sequentially repeated one by one (in this embodiment, to stop at the AB phase).

In the following explanation, the processing is divided into the second constant speed control process (Fig. 139) and the pull-in control process (Fig. 142). , the "second constant speed control" is being executed.

When the reel control status is "brake control", as shown in FIG. 129, the rotating reel is braked by performing 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) for 74.5 ms. , the reels are stopped.

Further, when the reel control status is "reel stop control", as shown in FIG. 129, the stop state is maintained by continuing the 1-2 phase 20% excitation (weak excitation).
<Operation>
Next, the operation of the slot machine 100 including the stepping motor 700 described above will be described.
<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main processing of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The basic control of the game is mainly performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. 121, the initial setting of the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the setting of interrupt inhibition, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 shown in FIG. 119 is lit according to the insertion of medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-controller 400 shown in FIG. When the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, the effective winning line is determined, and the random number generation circuit 316 generates a random number. Random numbers (first random number and second random number) are acquired. Also, in this step S102, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S103, internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. The details of this winning combination internal lottery process will be described later.

In step S104, reel stop preparation processing is performed. In the reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each of the reels 110 to 112 based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103.

In step S105, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation. The details of this reel rotation start processing will also be described later.

Steps S106 and S107 are performed for each reel and are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, so they are repeated three times. A stop button acceptance flag is prepared for each reel in the RAM 308 . Each reel is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one relationship, and the stop button reception flag also corresponds to the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one relationship. This stop button acceptance flag is set to either acceptance enabled or acceptance prohibited. In step S106, since the reel rotation start process (step S105) has started, the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept. The stop button acceptance flag is set to prohibit acceptance when the corresponding stop button is operated during the stop button acceptance process in the reel rotation control process executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S107, it is determined whether or not the stop button acceptance flag that was set to allow acceptance in step S106 has returned to prohibition of acceptance. This step S107 is repeatedly executed until the stop button reception flag returns to reception prohibition. That is, in step S107, it waits for the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 to be accepted. When the determination in step S107 becomes Yes for all three reels 110-112, all three reels 110-112 are stopped.

In the following step S108, the winning of the symbols stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined. Here, it is determined that the winning combination is won when the winning combination corresponding to the internally won winning combination or the winning combination with the flag being carried over is arranged (displayed) on the activated winning line. For example, if "replay-replay-replay" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won a replay prize. Also, in this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S109, medal payout processing is performed. In this medal payout process, if the player wins any winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, control for shifting the game state is performed. , Prepare to start the normal game from the next time. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S209 shown in FIG. 133) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.
<Winner internal lottery process>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the internal winning combination lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG.

At step S1031, the internal lottery for the winning combination shown in FIG. As a result of this internal lottery, if any winning combination is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is internally turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1032, a lottery for execution of reel effect is performed. The reel effect is a effect in which the spinning reels appear to be stopped. Strictly speaking, in the reel effect, the reels are not stopped but are swaying. The reel effects in this embodiment include a first reel effect that does not require the player's operation, and a second reel effect that requires the player to operate the stop buttons 137-139. The first reel effect is a so-called reel action, and the second reel effect is a so-called pseudo game. The lottery here uses the second random value obtained in step S102 and the reel effect execution possibility lottery table stored in the ROM 306 to execute the first reel effect, the second reel effect, and the reel effect. Any one lottery result is derived from the lottery results such as not executing the

In step S1033, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect (reel action) is won, and if it is won, the presence of the first reel effect is set in the reel effect information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1034), The process proceeds to step S1035. On the other hand, if the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1035.

In step S1035, it is determined whether or not the second reel effect (pseudo game) is won, and if it is won, the presence of the second reel effect is set in the reel effect information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1036), The process proceeds to step S1037. On the other hand, if the prize has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1037.

In step S1037, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery result command indicating the results of the internal lottery for the winning combination and the reel effect to the first sub-control unit 400, and the internal winning combination lottery process ends.
<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG.

In step S1050, a game time monitoring timer value is acquired. The game time monitoring timer is a timer stored in a specific storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and sets the time necessary for one game to a predetermined time (for example, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds). This is a timer that is set for the purpose of restricting the number of game media obtained or lost per unit time and restricting the gambling aspect of the game. The gaming time monitoring timer is set to a predetermined timer value (for example, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) in step S1052, which will be described later. Decremented.

In step S1051, it is determined whether or not the obtained gaming time monitoring timer value has passed 4.1 seconds or more. That is, if the value of the game time monitoring timer is 0, it means that 4.1 seconds or more have passed, but if the value of the game time monitoring timer is greater than 0, 4.1 seconds have passed. There will be no. When the game time monitoring timer value has passed 4.1 seconds or more, the current game may be started, so the process proceeds to step S1052. On the other hand, when the game time monitoring timer value has not passed 4.1 seconds, the process returns to step S1050 and is repeated. While repeating the process, the timer value of the game time monitoring timer is decremented for each timer interrupt of the main control unit 300, and when the game time monitoring timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, the game time monitoring timer value is reset. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds is stored in a specific area of RAM 308 . In the present embodiment, the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set is the start timing of one game. The end timing of one game is when the game time monitoring timer value is set next time. That is, one game is from setting the game time monitoring timer value to setting the next game time monitoring timer value. In addition, since the game time monitoring timer value is set each time the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the period between when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating and when each reel 110 to 112 next starts rotating is It can also be a single game. It should be noted that the end timing of one game may be when the value of the game time monitoring timer becomes 0 and the game state control process of S110 in FIG. 130 is finished. In addition, the start timing of one game is when an effective start lever is accepted, the end timing of one game is when an effective bet button operation can be accepted, and the start lever becomes effective from the time when the bet button operation can be accepted. The period until the time of acceptance may be used as a preparation period for the start of the next game.

In step S1053, the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 is set, and preparations for transmission are made. The reel rotation start command is a command indicating the start of rotation of the reels 110-112.

In step S1054, the status of the left reel 110 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1055, the status of the middle reel 111 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1056, the status of the right reel 112 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1057, it is determined whether or not the reel effect information set in step S1034 or step S1036 shown in FIG. , the reel control status is set to "reel effect control in progress" (step S1058), and the reel rotation start processing is terminated. If not set, the reel control status is set to "accelerating state (acceleration control in progress)" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start processing ends. As described above, the reel control status is information about the control state of the reels, which is stored independently for each reel 110 to 112 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Control state (during stop control)", "Acceleration state (during acceleration control)", "Constant speed 1 state (constant speed 1 control)", "Constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control)", "Retraction state" (during pull-in control)", "brake state (during brake control)", and "during reel performance control" is stored. Also, in step S1059, the acceleration start request flag is turned ON. The acceleration start request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is referred to in acceleration control processing, which will be described later.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 1.5 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 shown in FIG. is stored in the signal state storage area provided by dividing into

In step S204, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 121), and processing according to this status is performed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated according to their respective time units. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game time monitoring timer described above is updated by subtraction.

In step S206, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion errors, medal payout errors, etc. is monitored. performs error handling. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S207, stop button display control processing is performed. Details of the stop button display control process will be described later.

In step S208, if the status of each reel stored in the RAM 308 is "rotation start", reel rotation control processing (details will be described later) is performed. In this reel rotation control process, the rotation of the reels is controlled, and from a plurality of reel stop data candidates selected in step S106 of the main control unit main process, the actual After determining the reel stop data used for reel stop control, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped based on the determined reel stop data.

In step S<b>209 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. Bit 15 is strobe information (if ON, indicates that data is set) ~ 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, internal lottery command, rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, stop button accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137-139 reception command, stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of reels 110-112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, etc.), bits 0-10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Configure.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of effect control.

In step S210, external signal output processing is performed. In this external signal output process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

In step S211, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S213, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, various processes (timer interrupt end process) for ending the timer interrupt process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S213, when the power is restored, a specific variable and a stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 130 is returned to.
<Stop button display control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the stop button display control processing will be described in detail. Note that FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in FIG.

In step S2071, it is determined whether even one of the stop button acceptance flags corresponding to each of the three reels 110 to 112 is set to accept. As described above, the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept for each reel (for each stop button) in step S106 in the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. If all the stop button reception flags are set to prohibit reception, this stop button display control process ends. It is determined by referring to the reel control status of each reel whether or not the reels 110 to 112 have been shifted to the constant speed 2 state (step S2702). In this step S2702, if the reel control status of each reel is one of "constant speed 2 state", "pull-in state", and "brake state", the determination result is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if the reel control status of even one reel is "acceleration state" or "constant speed 1 state", the stop button display control processing ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the light shielding pieces have been detected by the index sensors for all the reels 110-112. The RAM 308 is provided with an index sensor detection storage area for storing detection information indicating whether or not the index sensor has detected the light shielding piece for each reel. The detection storage area is referred to and judgment is made. If undetected detection information is stored even for one reel, this stop button display control process ends. On the other hand, if the detected detection information is stored for all the reels 110 to 112, the process proceeds to step S2704.

The RAM 308 is also provided with a light emission mode storage area for storing the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside the stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively. That is, a lighting mode storage area is prepared for each reel (stop button). The initial light emitting mode of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, a non-light emitting mode (turned off mode) or a first color light emitting mode. Hereinafter, the initial light emission mode will be referred to as the first light emission mode. The lighting mode storage area initially stores the first lighting mode as the lighting mode information. At step S2704, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped (at least one reel is rotating), all the reels 110 to 112 have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, In addition, the light shielding piece is detected. In this state, the light emission mode of the light emitter provided inside the stop button for the reel that continues to rotate in the constant speed 2 state is changed from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. The second light emission mode is, for example, a blinking mode or a second color light emission mode. Moreover, when the first light emission mode is the light emission mode of the first color, it may be a non-light emission mode (a mode in which the light is turned off). Further, when the second light emission mode is the second color light emission mode, the first light emission mode may be a flashing mode. In this manner, the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode may be different from each other, including the extinguished mode and the blinking mode. The second lighting mode is a mode for notifying that the operation of the stop button in the second lighting mode is accepted. In other words, it is a mode informing that the reel corresponding to the stop button in the second light emission mode is in a stoppable state by operating the stop button. In step S2704, the light emitter information in the light emission mode storage area of the reel for which the stop button acceptance flag is set to be accepted is updated to the second light emission mode, and the stop button display control process ends. By executing this step S2704, for example, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped, all of the reels 110 to 112 have been shifted to the constant speed 2 state, and the light shielding piece has been detected. In this state, the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside all the stop buttons 137 to 139 change to the second light emission mode in unison. In addition, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and the light shielding piece has been detected, the remaining reels (rotating Only the lighting mode of the light emitter provided inside the stop button of the reel) changes to the second lighting mode.
<Reel Rotation Control Processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, reel rotation control processing will be described in detail. Note that FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation control process in step S208 shown in FIG.

Steps S208a to S208c are performed for each reel and are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, so step S208a is repeated at least three times. In this step S208a, it is determined whether or not the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept. That is, it is determined whether or not the target reel is rotating. If the stop button reception flag is set to prohibit reception, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a is executed for all reels, the process proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept, it is determined whether or not the light blocking piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor (step S208b). In this determination, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the index sensor has been received. If not, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or step S208a is executed for all reels. If so, the process proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if it has been received, the index sensor detection storage area of the target reel is updated with the detection information that has already been detected (step S208c), and the process proceeds to step S208d. As described above, in the present embodiment, every time the reel rotation control process is executed, if the stop button reception flag is set to accept reception, it is determined whether or not the light shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor. Therefore, even if the reel control status is "accelerating state" or "constant speed 1 state", the light shielding piece of the target reel can be detected. However, if the light shielding piece is detected only in "a certain state" (for example, "constant speed 1 state" or "constant speed 2 state"), refer to the reel control status between steps S208a and S208b. If Yes, step S208b is executed, and if No, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or step S208a is executed for all reels. If S208a is being executed, the process should proceed to step S208d.

In step S208d, stop button acceptance processing is executed. This stop button reception processing will be described later.

Steps S208f to S208k are performed for each reel, and are performed for the three reels 110-112. In step S208f, reel control information is obtained. Here, the reel control information means all information relating to rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 . In this embodiment, the reel control information includes values such as the reel control status described above, the general-purpose offset counter, the reel control status transition counter described later, and the holding counter.

In step S208g, reel control determination processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the acquired reel control information.

In step S208h, it is determined whether or not the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON. The reel driving signal switching request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and indicates whether or not to switch the currently set rotation control data. When the reel driving signal switching request flag is ON, the currently set rotation control data is switched, and when the reel driving signal switching request flag is OFF, the currently set rotation control data is not switched. Note that the reel driving signal switching request flag is set in the acceleration control process. If the reel driving signal switching request flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S208i, and if the reel driving signal switching request flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S208k.

In step S208i, rotation control data is acquired based on the reel control status and general-purpose offset counter value contained in the acquired reel control information. Specifically, the corresponding excitation table (rotation control data) is obtained from the table shown in FIG. 129 based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value. For example, if the reel control status is "under acceleration control" and the general-purpose offset counter value is "0", the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" is acquired.

At step S208j, the rotation control data obtained at step S208i is set.

In step S208k, since the contents of the reel control information have been changed according to the processing described above, the reel control information is updated.
<Reel control determination processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel control determination processing in step S208g shown in FIG. The reel control determination process is a process of sequentially switching reel rotation control according to the reel control status described above. Specifically, the processes are executed in the order of acceleration control process, reel effect control process, first constant speed control process, second constant speed control process, pull-in control process, and brake control process.

In step S301, the reel control status is acquired.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control status is "under control to stop", and when the acquired reel control status is "under control to stop", the reel control determination process ends. On the other hand, when the acquired reel control state is not "stop control", the process proceeds to S303.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control state is "reel effect control". When the reel control state is "under reel effect control", the process proceeds to step S304, and reel effect control processing is performed. As described above, the reel effects include the first reel effect (so-called reel action) that does not require player operation, and the reel effect (so-called pseudo game) that allows the player to operate the left, middle, and right stop buttons 137 to 139. There is. In the control of the first reel effect, at least one of control processing of acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, and brake control of this game may be diverted, or first reel effect control Each dedicated control process may be prepared. Also, in the first reel effect, the reels may be accelerated and then decelerated (executed brake control) before maintaining the constant speed state. In the control of the second reel effect, at least one of control processing of acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, brake control, and pull-in control of this game may be diverted, or reel effect Each control process dedicated to control may be prepared. In addition, pull-in control may be performed based on the number of sliding frames of 5 or more, which cannot be done in this game. After the end of the reel presentation, the reel control status is set to acceleration control after performing random delay processing for delaying the rotation start timing of each reel and preventing a plurality of reels from simultaneously starting to rotate. On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "reel effect control", the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "under acceleration control". When the reel control state is "under acceleration control", the process advances to step S306 to perform acceleration control processing (control processing for accelerating the rotation of the reel; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "under acceleration control", the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "constant speed 1 control". When the reel control state is "constant speed 1 control", the process advances to step S308 to perform a first constant speed control process (control process for maintaining reel rotation at a constant speed; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "constant speed 1 control", the process proceeds to step S309.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "constant speed 2 control". When the reel control state is "constant speed 2 control", the process advances to step S310 to perform the second constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reels at a constant speed; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "constant speed 2 control", the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control state is "under brake control". When the reel control state is "under brake control", the process proceeds to step S312, and brake control processing (control processing for stopping the rotation of the reel; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "under brake control", the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S313, since the reel control state is "in control of retraction", retraction control processing (processing for controlling reel retraction to the stop position; details will be described later) is performed.
<Acceleration control processing>
FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG.

In step S306a, it is determined whether or not there is an acceleration start request based on the acceleration start request flag. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to ON in step S1059 of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 132, YES is determined in step S306a of the first timer interrupt process. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF in step S306d, which will be described later, NO is determined in step S306a of the second and subsequent timer interrupt processes. If there is an acceleration start request, the process proceeds to step S306b, and if there is no acceleration start request, the process proceeds to step S306f.

In step S306b, the value of the reel control status transition counter is set to 0, which is the initial value. Here, the reel control status transition counter is a counter that measures the number of repetition sets (the number of cycles) of the rotation control data of 8 steps per cycle, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. and terminate the acceleration control process.

In step S306c, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the general-purpose offset counter.

In step S306d, the reel driving signal switching request flag is turned ON. Also, the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306e, a dummy value of 0 is set to the symbol interval counter (details will be described later). The value of the symbol interval counter set in step S306e is used in the second constant speed control process, which will be described later. After completing the process of step S306e, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306f, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding counter. The value of the holding counter is set in step S306q, which will be described later, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process. Note that the initial value set in the holding counter in step S306q is the value of the holding parameter corresponding to the set general-purpose offset counter value. For example, as shown in FIG. , 12 is set in the holding counter as an initial value.

In step S306g, the reel driving signal switching request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306h, it is determined whether or not the decremented holding counter value is zero. If the value of the hold counter is 0, it is time to switch the rotation control data, so the process proceeds to step S306i. become.

In step S306i, since it is time to switch the rotation control data, the reel driving signal switching request flag is set to ON.

In step S306j, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter in order to set the next rotation control data.

In step S306k, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is finished, so the process proceeds to step S306l. Since the control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306l, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the general-purpose offset counter value in order to shift to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S306m, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S306n, it is determined whether or not the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 3. When the value of the reel control status transition counter is 3, the process proceeds to step S306o, and when the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 3, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306o, since all rotation controls set during acceleration control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 1 control".

In step S306p, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the reel control status transition counter. After the process of step S306p ends, the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306q, the rotation control table shown in FIG. 129 is referenced, and the retention parameter value corresponding to the set reel control status transition counter value and general-purpose offset counter value is obtained when the reel control status is "under acceleration control". and sets the obtained retention parameter value as the initial value of the retention counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, when the reel control status transition counter value is 0 and the general offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value of the holding counter, the reel control status transition counter value is 1, and the general offset counter value is 12. If 7, then 1 is set as the initial value of the hold counter. After the process of step S306q ends, the acceleration control process ends.
<First constant speed control process>
FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG.

In step S308a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the first constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 129, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Since the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON in step S1309 of the acceleration control process, the switching process is not performed. It remains ON during the second constant speed control process. Therefore, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 135, the rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j of FIG. 135).

In step S308b, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process advances to step S308c to shift to rotation control for the next set (cycle). Since rotation control has not ended, the first constant speed control process ends.

In step S308c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle).

In step S308d, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S308e, it is determined whether or not the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 16. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 16, 16 sets of rotation control have been completed (see FIG. 129), so the process proceeds to step S308f. The constant speed control process ends.

In step S308f, since all rotation controls set during constant speed 1 control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 2 control".
<Second constant speed control process>
FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. The second constant-speed control process mainly carries out the process of tracking the symbol positions on the reels. In order for the main control unit 300 to grasp the symbol positions on the reels, the symbol positions are monitored using two counters, a "symbol number counter" and a "symbol interval counter". Here, the "symbol number counter" and the "symbol interval counter" will be explained.

FIG. 122 is also a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter. The symbol number counter is a counter provided in the RAM 308 for storing and holding the symbol positioned at the middle stage of the symbol display window 113, which is the reference position. BB pattern is the reference position, and counting starts when the index sensor 606A passes the light shielding piece 612D. Each symbol and a count value are associated in advance, and the main control unit 300 can identify the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113 from the value of the symbol number counter when the reels are stopped, and judge winning. can. The pattern interval counter is also a counter provided in the RAM 308, and counts the number of driving pulses (the number of times of timer interrupt processing) per one pattern. The main control unit 300 sets the number of driving pulses per symbol (here, 24) in the symbol interval counter, subtracts each time the driving pulse is output, and when the value of the symbol interval counter becomes 0, the symbol number counter. is updated by 1.

In step S310a, 1 is added to the value of the general offset counter. That is, in the second constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 129, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. In addition, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control processing of FIG. 135 step S208l).

In step S310b, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process advances to step S310c to shift to rotation control for the next set (cycle). Since the rotation control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S310d.

In step S310c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle).

In step S310d, 1 is subtracted from the value of the symbol interval counter. That is, the value of the pattern interval counter is decremented for each interrupt time.

In step S310e, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the pattern interval counter is zero. When the value of the pattern interval counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S310f, and when the value of the pattern interval counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S310h.

In step S310f, when the value of the pattern interval counter is 0, the value of the pattern interval counter is set to 24, which is the initial value, because it is replaced by the next pattern.

In step S310g, 1 is subtracted from the value of the symbol number counter so as to update to the next symbol.

In step S310h, detection information of the index sensor is obtained from the index sensor detection storage area of the RAM308. As described above, this detection information is updated in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 135 (step S208c). In each of the three reels, the light shielding piece is provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the pattern interval counter value is 0. detected when it passes through.

In step S310i, when the acquired detection information of the index sensor has been detected, the process proceeds to step S310j, and when not detected, the process proceeds to step S310n.

In step S310j, since the symbol position on the reel has been searched, the stop button validity information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM308. That is, when the light shielding piece provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0 is detected in a constant speed state, the stop position of the reel can be controlled, and the reel can be stopped. become. When the stop button valid information is set (when the stop is enabled), the operation of the stop button can be accepted. When a stop button for which stop button valid information is not set is operated, even if the operation itself is accepted, the operation is invalidated and the reel corresponding to the stop button does not stop. Alternatively, the operation itself may not be accepted.

In this embodiment, the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process, but steps S310h to S310j are executed in the first constant speed control process, so that the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process. may be set in the first constant speed control process.

In step S310k, the value of the pattern interval counter is set to 24, which is the initial value.

In step S310l, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the pattern number counter.

In step S310m, the value of the step-out detection counter provided in the RAM 308 is set to 0, which is the initial value. After the process of step S310m ends, the second constant speed control process ends.

In step S310n, step-out detection processing is performed based on the value of the step-out detection counter. In the step-out detection process, the value of the step-out detection counter is incremented by 1 for each interrupt to obtain a specific value (for example, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees), here 504). ), step-out (so-called out-of-step) is determined, and acceleration control is restarted for all reels that are not operated, but acceleration control may be restarted only for the stepped-out reels. In this embodiment, the step-out detection process is performed only in the second constant-speed control process. In this case, the step-out detection process is not performed, and the main control unit 300 cannot detect the step-out. However, the step-out detection process may be performed during this period as well. In addition to the step-out, processing for detecting other abnormal states (for example, resonance, misstep, motor stoppage) may be performed. After the process of step S310n ends, the second constant speed control process ends.
<Stop button reception processing>
FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing in detail the stop button acceptance process of step S208d shown in FIG. The stop button acceptance process is executed after the stop button validity information is set in the state where the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, that is, in step S310j of the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. It is what is done. The stop button acceptance process is a process of determining the stop position of the corresponding reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 137-139.

In step S208d1, stop acceptance information is acquired. Here, the stop acceptance information is stop button valid information or a part of the reel control information, and means all information necessary for determining stop acceptance.

In step S208d2, a stoppable reel is determined from the obtained stop reception information, and stoppable reel information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example, when it is determined that the left reel 110 is a stoppable reel, , set the left reel 110).

In step S208d3, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the reel represented by the set stoppable reel information has been operated. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel has been accepted. If there is an operation (acceptance) of the stop button, the process proceeds to step S208d4, and if there is no operation (acceptance) of the stop button, the process proceeds to step S208d8.

In step S208d4, data on the reel to be stopped (reel data to be stopped) is acquired.

In step S208d5, a pull-in counter setting process (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S208d6, by operating the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel, the status of the stopped reel is updated to "stop".

In step S208d7, the stop button acceptance flag, which has been set to allow acceptance, is set to prohibit acceptance.

In step S208d8, the lighting mode information stored in the lighting mode storage area prepared for each reel in the RAM 308 is updated. That is, the lighting mode of the light emitter built into the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped is updated from the second lighting mode (eg, blue lighting mode) to the first lighting mode (eg, red lighting mode). . When step S208d8 ends, the stop button acceptance process ends.
<Pull-in counter setting processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process in step S208d5 shown in FIG.

In step S8d51, the value of the pattern number counter is acquired to detect the position where the stop operation was performed.

In step S8d52, the number of frames to be drawn is acquired from the selected reel stop control data based on the position where the stop operation was performed. That is, reel stop control data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process (internal lottery result) shown in FIG. In the reel stop control data, the number of drawing frames corresponding to the symbol position number at the symbol position (middle stage reference) when the stop operation is performed is defined.

In step S8d53, the excitation table is referenced to obtain the remaining number of interrupts. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the motor is stopped at a position corresponding to the AB phase, so that the excitation phase following the excitation phase indicated by the previously set rotation control data (the last rotation control data set during the constant speed 2 control) is stopped. The number of steps from the excitation phase to the excitation phase one ahead of the AB phase is obtained as the remaining number of interrupts. For example, if a stop operation is performed during control using the excitation table 22H during constant speed 2 control, the remaining number of interrupts is 3 steps.

In step S8d54, a pull-in counter value is calculated from the acquired pull-in frame number and interrupt remaining number, and the calculated pull-in counter value is set in the pull-in counter. Specifically, a predetermined pre-determined position (for example, the AB phase corresponding to the stop-holding position) before the stop-holding position (for example, a position corresponding to a predetermined AB phase) where the rotor 740 is scheduled to be stopped and held. The value up to the position corresponding to the AB phase one cycle before) becomes the step number corresponding to the pull-in frame number, and the value obtained by adding the interrupt remaining number to this value is set in the pull-in counter.

In step S8d55, the reel control status is set to "pull-in control".
<pull-in control processing>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. Here, the pull-in control process is to realize stop control according to the result of the internal lottery. In this embodiment, it refers to a process of sliding and stopping 0 to 4 frames. As a result, for a winning combination that has been internally won in an internal lottery, or a winning combination whose flag is being carried over, the corresponding symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed together. Otherwise, each winning combination is permitted. The symbol combinations corresponding to are not displayed together.

In step S3131, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the pull-in control process, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is updated for each timer interrupt process. In addition, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control processing shown in FIG. See step S208j in FIG. 135).

In step S3132, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the rotation control for the rest of the set (cycle) has ended, so the process advances to step S3133. Since the remaining rotation control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S3134.

In step S3133, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the general-purpose offset counter.

In step S3134, the value of the pull-in counter is updated. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pull-in counter.

In step S3135, it is determined whether or not the updated pull-in counter value is zero. If the value of the attraction counter is 0, the process advances to step S3136, and if the value of the attraction counter is not 0, the attraction control process ends.

In step S3136, the pull-in counter value becomes 0 and the stop position is reached, so the reel control status is set to "under brake control".

In step S3137, an initial value of 50 is set as the value of the holding counter. Here, this set holding counter value 50 is the holding time of the rotation control data when the general-purpose offset counter value is 0 when the reel control status is "under brake control" (see FIG. 129). After the process of step S3137 ends, the pull-in control process ends.
<Brake control processing>
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG.

In step S3121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding counter. The value of the holding counter is initialized in step S3137 shown in FIG. 142, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process.

In step S3122, it is determined whether or not the decremented holding counter value is zero. If the value of the holding counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S3123, and if the value of the holding counter is not 0, the brake control process ends.

In step S3123, since rotation control in brake control is completed, the reel control status is set to "reel stop control in progress". When the reel control status is "reel stop control", weak excitation (20% excitation) is continued at the stop holding position (for example, predetermined AB phase) (see FIG. 129). After the process of step S3123 ends, the brake control process ends.
<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
The processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of command input processing of the first sub-controller 400, FIG. 4C is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, ) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S2004, first sub-control unit command input processing (details will be described later) is performed. In the first sub-controller command input process, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S2005, effect update processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S2004, based on the results of each event processing corresponding to this command (for example, effect setting processing, game state control processing, etc.), effect data is read from the ROM 406, etc. , and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data of each effect device (speaker, lamp, liquid crystal image display device, shutter, etc.) is updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in step S2005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418 .

In step S2007, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S2005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S2008, information output processing is performed. In the information output process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S2005, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S2002. As a result, the set control command is transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, the command input processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). This first sub-controller 400 command input processing is a flow chart showing the flow of the first sub-controller 400 command input processing in step S2004 of FIG. 144(a).

In step S2101, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command in the command storage area of the RAM 408 or not. If there is an unprocessed command, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if there is no unprocessed command, the first sub-controller 400 command input processing ends.

In step S2102, the process jumps to the process according to the unprocessed command. For example, when the unprocessed command is a medal insertion command, processing when inserting medals, processing when receiving a start lever when receiving a start lever, processing when receiving a start lever when an internal lottery command, processing when an internal lottery is performed, stop button In the case of the reception command, the processing jumps to the stop button reception processing, the display judgment command jumps to the display judgment processing, and the game state command jumps to the game state control processing.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(c). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S2201 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(d). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S2301, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 144(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S2302, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, a specific example in which the reels 110 to 112 start rotating from a stopped state will be described.

First, a conventional example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 shows the changes in the state of the three reels, the changes in the detection state of the light shielding pieces provided on each reel in the index sensor, and the changes in the operation-acceptable state of the stop button corresponding to each reel. 4 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of light emitters built into each stop button.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 145 shows start lever operation, left reel, middle reel, and right reel in order from the top. At the top of the timing chart, symbols indicating timings (a) to (f) are marked, and below them are arrows (a), (b), and (c). Arrows are indicated. The arrow (A) indicates the period during which the acceleration control shown in FIG. 129 is being executed. Before the period indicated by the arrow (A), each of the reels 110 to 112 was in a state of being stopped after rotating. The (C) arrow represents the period during execution of the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, and the (C) arrow represents the period during execution of the second constant speed control shown in FIG. be.

At the timing of (a), the start lever is turned on, and the left reel, middle reel, and right reel start rotating all at once. As indicated by the arrow (A), all the reels are in the period during which acceleration control is being executed. Acceleration control ends at the timing (b), and all the reels enter the period during which the first constant speed control is being executed as indicated by the (i) arrow. At the timing of (c), the first constant speed control ends, and all the reels are in the period of execution of the second constant speed control as indicated by the (c) arrow. In this example, neither the acceleration control nor the first constant-speed control is detected, and the light-shielding strips of the reels are not detected during the second constant-speed control. The light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the middle reel is detected at the timing of (e), and the light shielding piece of the right reel is detected at the timing of (f). The timing at which the light shielding piece of each reel is detected varies, and the detection timing differs depending on the position at which the reel was stopped before starting rotation.

Conventionally, during the period during which the second constant-speed control shown in FIG. 129 is being executed, all the stop buttons are brought into a ready-to-operate state all at once at the timing when all the light shielding pieces are detected. Until then, each stop button cannot be operated even if it is operated, but after the timing of (f), any stop button can be operated. The timing chart shown in FIG. 145 indicates whether the operation of the left stop button is acceptable/not acceptable, the operation of the middle stop button is acceptable/not acceptable, and the operation of the right stop button is acceptable/not acceptable. In addition, even if the operation of the stop button is accepted, the operation may be handled invalidly or effectively for control purposes. Acceptable/unacceptable represents reel stoppable state/stoppable state.

Furthermore, below it, the light emission mode of the light emitter (hereinafter referred to as "stop button LED") built in each stop button is shown. The first light emission mode of each stop button LED is, for example, a red light emission mode, and the second light emission mode is, for example, a blue light emission mode. All of the stop button LEDs change to the second light emission mode after the timing of (f). That is, in the stop button operation unacceptable state (reels unstoppable state), all of the stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode, and when the stop button operation acceptable state (reel stop possible state) is shifted, any stop The button LED also changes to the second lighting mode. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 135, the stop button LED notifies that the operation of the stop button is unacceptable (the reel cannot be stopped) in the first light emission mode, and the stop button operation is acceptable (the reel can be stopped). state) in the second light emission mode.

FIG. 146 shows changes in the states of the reels 110 to 112, changes in the detection state of the respective light shielding pieces, changes in the states of the stop buttons 137 to 139 capable of accepting operations, and changes in the states of the stop buttons 137a to 139b. 139a is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of 139a. 145 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 145 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 146, when the light shielding piece is detected on any one of the three reels 110 to 112, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to the reel on which the light shielding piece is detected is accepted. Move to enabled state. That is, after starting rotation, it is possible to shift from the reel stop impossible state to the reel stop possible state for each reel. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 146, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (detected at the timing of (d)), so that the left stop button 137 is first detected (at the timing of (d)). ), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (detected at the timing of (e)), so that the middle stop button 138 transitions to the operation-acceptable state at the timing of (e). Finally, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (detected at the timing of (f)), so that the right stop button 139 shifts to the operation-acceptable state at the timing of (f). However, any of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a does not change from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode until the timing (timing (f)) when all the light shielding pieces are detected, as in the conventional art. . In other words, the reel-to-reel non-stoppable state can be shifted to the reel-stoppable state for each reel, but the stop button LEDs change to the second emission mode collectively at the timing when the last reel shifts to the reel-stoppable state. . Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the stop button LED is in the first light emission mode, the corresponding stop button may be in the operation-acceptable state. The arrow (E) shown in FIG. 146 represents a period during which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-acceptable state. On the other hand, the (O) arrow represents the period during which all of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are in an operation-acceptable state.

According to the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, by accepting the stop operation from the reel whose stop position can be controlled by detecting the light shielding piece, the operation of the stop button is accepted earlier than before. will be available. Therefore, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. In addition, there is a case where the presence of the game can be heightened by immediately responding to the player's operation.

FIG. 147 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 147, a step-out occurs in the right reel 112 at the stage when the light shielding piece of any reel is not detected. That is, while all reels 110 to 112 are under the second constant speed control, only the right reel 112 is stepped out (timing (g)). After step-out occurs on the right reel 112, the step-out is detected by the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 139 (timing of (a')). Detected (at the timing of (d)), the left stop button 137 is ready to be operated (the left reel 110 is ready to be stopped). In addition, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected before the step-out is detected (timing (e)), and the middle stop button 138 is also ready for operation before the step-out is detected (the middle reel 111 is also ready to be stopped). ). Even if some of the stop buttons are ready to be operated (during the period of the arrow (e)), some of the stop buttons are not operated, and eventually the right reel 112 steps out at the timing of (a'). is detected. When the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, both the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111 continue to rotate at a constant speed. become. That is, not only the stepped-out right reel 112 but also the remaining two reels (110, 111) rotating at a constant speed are accelerated again. The step-out and re-acceleration have changed the positional relationship of the light-shielding pieces on the respective reels, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after re-acceleration, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is first detected. ((d') timing), then the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the middle reel 111 light blocking piece is detected ((f') timing). Therefore, after re-acceleration, the order in which the stop buttons become ready to accept operations (the order in which the reels become stop-ready) is different from that before re-acceleration. The stop button LEDs 137a to 139a remain in the first light emission mode before reacceleration, but change to the second light emission mode at the timing (f') after reacceleration.

FIG. 148 is a timing chart when step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. 147 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 147 will be mainly described. Figure 148 shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 148, the right reel 112 is stepped out (timing (g)), the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 is operated. become acceptable. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the step-out occurring in the right reel 112 is detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. Note that the timing chart of FIG. 148 shows the state of the left reel 110 ignoring the reel pull-in control (the same applies to subsequent timing charts). Before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the light blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)), but the middle stop button 138 is not operated, and the middle reel 111 remains stationary. Keep spinning fast.

Before long, the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected at the timing of (a'). At the timing (a'), the left reel 110 is in a stopped state, the middle reel 111 is in a constant speed rotation state, and the right reel 112 is in a step-out state. When the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, acceleration control is restarted except for the stopped reel, that is, only the rotating reel. As a result, the stepped-out right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 are accelerated again, and the previously stopped left reel 110 maintains the stopped state.

The left reel 110 maintains a stopped state even when the re-accelerated right reel 112 and middle reel 111 shift to constant speed rotation. will not be ready for operation.

The light shielding piece of the re-accelerated right reel 112 is detected at the timing (d'), and the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 which is re-accelerated is detected at the timing (f'). When the light-shielding pieces of all the rotating reels except the stop reel are detected, the stop button LED corresponding to the rotating reel changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the right stop button LED 139a and the middle stop button LED 138a change to the second light emission mode at the timing (f') when the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emission mode.

FIG. 149 is a timing chart when a power failure and power recovery occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is first detected (timing (d)), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally The light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). During the period indicated by the arrow (O), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stoppable state. However, when none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated and the three reels 110 to 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed, power failure occurs. All of the three reels 110 to 112 rotating by inertia stop until the power is restored. Eventually, the power is restored at the timing of (a'), the three reels 110 to 112 all start acceleration control, and after the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is being executed. When each reel stops due to power failure, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after the power is restored, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is first detected ( (d') timing), then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((f') timing). Therefore, after the power is restored, the order in which the stop buttons become ready to accept operations (the order in which the reels become ready to be stopped) is different from that before the power failure.

The example of FIG. 149 described above is an example in which a period of time has elapsed from when the power was cut off to when the power was restored. When the power is restored immediately after the power is cut off, that is, when the power is restored before stopping even though the rotation speed of the reel is reduced, each reel is detected in the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 139 after the power is restored. Step-outs of reels 110 to 112 are detected, and like the right reel 112 described in the example shown in FIG.

The power failure/recovery example described with reference to FIG. 149 may occur after the examples shown in the timing charts of FIGS.

FIG. 150 is a timing chart when the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode in the slot machine 100 according to this embodiment. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. FIG. 150 also shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (d), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emission mode. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. At the timing of (e), the light blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is detected. At the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected. The middle reel 111 continues rotating at a constant speed even at the timing of (f). In other words, the middle stop button 138 is not operated even when it becomes ready for operation at the timing of (e). At this timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second lighting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first lighting mode. In this way, the stop button LED of the reel stopped before changing to the second light emission mode remains in the first light emission mode. If the middle stop button 138 is operated between the timing (e) and the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a remains in the first light emission mode even at the timing (f). , and only the right stop button LED 139a changes to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 151 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment detects the light shielding piece and stops the game at the shortest number of frames. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. FIG. 151 also shows left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139, respectively, at the bottom.

As indicated by the values of the hold parameters in FIG. 129, acceleration control requires 60 interrupts, and first constant speed control requires 128 interrupts. Further, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected, the stop button cannot shift to the operation-acceptable state unless the state shifts to the second constant-speed control. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 151, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (timing (b)) at which the first constant speed control is started. It is possible that the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during the acceleration control (the period indicated by the arrow (A)). However, the light blocking piece may not be detected during the acceleration control, and the light blocking piece may be detected only during the constant speed state (during the first constant speed control or during the second constant speed control).

FIG. 152 shows the state of the left reel at each timing. Fig. 152 shows Fig. 152(b), Fig. 152(b'), Fig. 152(c'), Fig. 152(c''-1) and Fig. 152(c''-2). In both figures, the left reel 110 is shown on the left side, the right reel 112 is shown on the right side, and the middle reel 111 is shown in the center.

In FIG. 152(b), the left reel 110, the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are all rotating, but only the left reel 110 is shown so that the pattern can be seen (FIG. 152(b')). and (c') in the same figure). FIG. 152(b) shows the left reel 110 at the timing of FIG. 151(b). That is, when the first constant speed control is started (when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected), the value of the symbol number counter shown in FIG. 0 BB pattern is located.

24 drive pulses must be output to move one symbol. On the left reel 110, the middle stage of the symbol display window 113 is displayed with a symbol with a symbol number counter value of 20 (cherry symbol) and a symbol with a symbol number counter of 19 (BB symbol). , 18 symbols (replay symbols), and 17 symbols (bell symbols) pass in order. When the symbol (bell symbol) whose value of the symbol number counter is 17 has passed through the middle stage of the symbol display window 113 (timing of (b′) shown in FIG. 151), 120 drive pulses are generated from the timing of (b). (24 drive pulses×5 symbols) are output. FIG. 152(b') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of this (b'), and the watermelon symbol whose value of the symbol number counter is 16 is positioned in the middle row of the symbol display window 113. is doing.

Furthermore, when 8 drive pulses are output, the control is switched to the second constant speed control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 151, the timing at which the 8 drive pulses are output is shown as timing (c). At the timing of (c), the left stop button 137 shifts to an operation-acceptable state due to the start of the second constant speed control. That is, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected first, the stop button will not be ready to be operated until the second constant speed control is started. However, as a condition for transitioning to the state where the stop button can be operated, the condition that the light shielding piece is detected is the same, but if the control state is the first constant speed control, the stop button can be operated. You may make it transfer to a state.

Also, in the time chart shown in FIG. 151, the timing (c') indicates the timing at which the second constant speed control is started and the first one drive pulse is output. At this timing (c'), the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped.

FIG. 152(c') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (c'), and in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, a bar symbol whose value of the symbol number counter is 15 is displayed. /24 frames. The bar pattern is a so-called DDT pattern, and if the stop button is operated with the aim of stopping the bar pattern in the middle stage, a small winning combination will not be missed. Incidentally, the bar pattern may be called a specific pattern or a certain pattern.

FIG. 152(c''-1) and FIG. 152(c''-2) are diagrams showing the stop symbol mode of the left reel 110 stopped at the timing of (c'). When the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 122(b) is internally won, as shown in FIG. stops at the bottom. On the other hand, when the small combination of cherry shown in FIG. 122(b) is internally won, the bar pattern is stopped in the middle of the pattern display window 113 as shown in FIG. 152(c''-2). Instead, pull-in control is performed, and after two frames slide, the cherry symbol stops at the upper row.

FIG. 153 is a timing chart when an effect relating to reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. At the bottom of FIG. 153, the rendering device is shown. This effect device is, for example, the effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device).

The first effect in the effect device is started when the start lever 135 is operated. Alternatively, it starts when all reels 110-112 start spinning. Alternatively, it is started when the acceleration control of all the reels 110-112 is started. As will be described later, the reels may be subject to random delay processing for delaying the rotation start timing of each reel. do not have. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 153, the operation timing of the start lever 135, the rotation start timing of all the reels 110 to 112, and the acceleration control start timing for all the reels 110 to 112 are the same. is. The first effect in the effect device is started from the timing of (a).

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a first effect in the effect device.

154, the effect image display device 157, which is an example of the effect device, is shown at the top, and the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are shown below it. . Furthermore, below each reel, stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to each reel are shown. Stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are built into each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively.

FIG. 154(A) shown on the left side is a diagram showing an example in which a small combination suggestive effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157 . On the other hand, FIG. 154(B) shown on the right side is a diagram showing an example in which the navigation effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157 .

First, the small role suggesting production will be described. (a1) in FIG. 154(A) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 153 (the start timing of the first effect). In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a1), a watermelon pattern is displayed, suggesting that a small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 122(b) is internally won. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a1) have started to rotate. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG.

(d1) in FIG. 154(A) shows the timing (d) shown in FIG. ), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown. Also in the effect image display device 157 shown in (d1), the small combination suggesting effect continues and the watermelon pattern is displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to be operated also emits light in the first light emission mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f1) in FIG. 154(A) shows an effect at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. Also in the effect image display device 157 shown in (f1), the small combination suggesting effect continues and the watermelon pattern is displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are shown through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 to change to the second light emission mode and emit light.

In addition, in the small combination suggesting effect, the watermelon pattern may be continuously displayed, or the watermelon pattern may be repeatedly displayed and hidden.

Next, the navigation effect will be described. The navigation effect is a effect for instructing the order of the stop operation of the stop button for winning a prize combination. (a2) in FIG. 154(B) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 153 (the start timing of the first effect). In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a2), numbers indicating the order of the stop operation are displayed at locations directly above the reels 110-112. That is, 3 is displayed on the left reel 110 , 2 is displayed on the middle reel 111 , and 1 is displayed on the right reel 112 . Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a2) have started to rotate. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG.

(d2) in FIG. 154(B) shows the timing (d) shown in FIG. ), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in this (d2) as well, the navigation effect continues, and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to be operated also emits light in the first light emission mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f2) in FIG. 154(B) shows an effect at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in this (f2) as well, the navigation effect continues, and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Also, the three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f2) all continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are shown through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 to change to the second light emission mode and emit light.

In the navigation effect shown in FIG. 154(B) described above, the order of stop operations different from the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reels are detected is displayed. However, the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reel are detected may coincide with the order in which the stop operation is instructed in the navigation effect.

Also in the navigation effect, the number representing the order of the stop operation may be continuously displayed, or the display and non-display of the number may be repeated.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when slide-push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139, but only part of the operations are accepted. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. Figure 155 shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

The operation of slide push is to operate a plurality of stop buttons 137-139 in a short time. In the example in FIG. 155, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h1) , a slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137-139. That is, the left stop button 137 is first operated, then the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are successively operated (forward pressed) so as to trace in a short period of time. When the slide push is performed, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in the operation unacceptable state. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the slide push operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). and the operation of the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 need to be operated again. Note that, as described above, the arrow (d) indicates a period in which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-acceptable state. Also, at the timing of (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

While the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the arrow in (e)), the slide push of the two stop buttons, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, is performed. perform an operation. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h2), and the right stop button 139 is operated at the timing of (h3). Both the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are brake-controlled and stopped.

After each of the three reels 110 to 112 is brake-controlled and stopped, the start lever 135 is operated again, and each of the three reels 110 to 112 starts rotating ((a') ting). That is, the next game is started. In this next game as well, after the first constant speed control is executed, the second constant speed control is started (timing of (c')). During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Next, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e')), and the middle stop button 138 is also ready for operation. Finally, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing of (f')), and the right stop button 139 is also ready for operation. In addition, when the light shielding pieces of all the three reels 110 to 112 are detected while none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built in each stop button are illuminated in the second light emission mode. change to The first stop button LED 137a remained in the first light emission mode in the previous game, but changes to the second light emission mode in the current game.

FIG. 156 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are all accepted. 155 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 155 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 156, the slide push operation is performed after all the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110-112 are detected. Therefore, when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready to be operated and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the (o) arrow), A slide push operation is started. Here too, the operation is performed continuously in a short time in the order of pressing from the left stop button 137, and the operation timings ((h), (h'), (h'') of the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 are ), brake control is executed for the corresponding reel, the corresponding reel stops, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. The execution period of brake control for each reel may overlap.

FIG. 157 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the real game is played after the pseudo game is played. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. FIG. 157 also shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

The pseudo-game is a kind of reel effect (the second reel effect described above), and similar to the main game, it is an effect that makes it look as if the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is stopped by operating the stop button. . In this game, medals are given according to the derived stop mode after the reels are completely stopped, but in the pseudo game, medals are not given according to the derived stop mode.

Even in a pseudo game, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. The light shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in the order of the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, and the stop button corresponding to the reel on which the light shielding piece is detected. 137 to 139 are ready for operation. Then, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second lighting mode only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, even if the pseudo-game is started, there is no change from the main game, and the player cannot distinguish between the pseudo-game and the main game. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 157, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the left stop button 137 is slide pushed, and the operation timing ((h) of each stop button 137 to 139) , (h'), (h'')), the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. In the pseudo-game, stop control is not executed, instead vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reels. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds so that the symbols can be clearly seen by the player. In the pseudo-game, it is also possible to draw more than the maximum drawing number of symbols. For example, in the case of the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). In addition, if a small winning combination is internally won, a vibrating display is made of the complete bar pattern. The player notices through the vibration display that the previous game was a pseudo game.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started. This game is started without operating the start lever 135 . When the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated in the pseudo-game, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating simultaneously, the reel 110 keeps the positional relationship in which the BB patterns are arranged side by side. ~112 will rotate. In such a positional relationship, the BB symbols of all the reels 110 to 112 appear in the symbol display window 113 at the same timing, so that a skilled player who is good at aiming at symbols can easily aim at the BB symbols. For this reason, it becomes impossible to ensure the fairness of the game with beginners who are not good at aiming at symbols. In addition, since it becomes easier to aim at the symbols, the interest in the game is reduced for the player who is looking forward to performing the stop operation aiming at the symbols. Therefore, random delay control is performed to randomly delay the rotation start timing of the reels between the reels, thereby breaking the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are arranged side by side. The game was started at the timing of (i), but none of the reels 110 to 112 started to rotate. after a lapse of time), the right reel 112 starts to rotate. Next, after n2 interrupts (n2>n1) from the start of the game (after the second time has passed), the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Finally, after n3 interrupts (n3>n2) from the start of the game (after the third time has passed), the left reel 110 starts rotating. When the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the acceleration control is executed for 60 interrupts, but the execution period is shifted. The (A) arrow shown in this game represents the period from the start of the acceleration control on the right reel 112 to the end of the acceleration control on the last left reel 110 . Next, in each reel, when the acceleration control ends, the first constant speed control is started. The (b) arrow shown in this game indicates the period from the start of the first constant speed control on the right reel 112 to the end of the last constant speed control on the left reel 110. It represents Subsequently, in each reel, when the first constant speed control ends, the second constant speed control is started. The period during which the reels 110 to 112 are subjected to the second constant speed control in this game is indicated by the (U) arrow. Before the last left reel 110 finishes the first constant speed control, the first right reel 112 starts the second constant speed control. By performing pseudo-game and random delay processing, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first. ((f') timing), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing). Therefore, the order in which the stop button becomes ready for operation (the order in which the reels become ready to be stopped) is different between this game and the pseudo-game. Also in this game, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected (timing (d')).

FIG. 158 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the main game is played after the reel action is performed. 158 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 158 will be mainly described.

The reel action is a type of reel effect (the first reel effect described above), and unlike this game, it is an effect that makes it appear as if the reels have stopped without operating the stop button. It should be noted that, like the pseudo-game, the reel action does not award medals.

In the reel action, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. Further, the light shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in order of the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111 light shielding piece, and the right reel 112 light shielding piece. However, even if the light blocking piece is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 do not enter the operation-acceptable state and remain in the operation-unacceptable state. Also, even if the light blocking pieces of all the reels 110-112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a-139a remain in the first light emission mode. Before long, the reels 110-112 automatically start brake control without the operation of the stop buttons 137-139. In this reel action as well, stop control is not performed, and instead vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reel. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds so that the symbols can be clearly seen by the player. For example, in the case of the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). In addition, if a small winning combination is internally won, a vibrating display is made of the complete bar pattern.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the reel action ends and the game starts. This game is the same as the game described with reference to FIG. 157, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are performed. By performing the reel action and the random delay process, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first. ((f') timing), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing). Therefore, in this game and the reel action, the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected may differ. However, since there is no need to operate the stop button in the reel action, even if this order is changed, the effect on the player is small.

Next, simultaneous pressing will be described. Simultaneous pressing here means that all the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated at the same time or almost at the same time. For example, when the time required from the first stop button operation to the last stop button operation is within a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms), it is determined as "simultaneous press". The predetermined time is set in consideration of the average time required for continuous operation of all the stop buttons 137 to 139, and can be arbitrarily changed within the time range judged to be a relatively quick stop operation. is.

In the case of simultaneous pressing, in order for a specific combination of symbols to win, the symbols of each reel constituting the specified combination of symbols should not be adjacent to each other within a maximum of four symbols between the reels. I can't.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols forming a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. FIG.

FIG. 159(a) is a diagram showing an example in which replay is internally won in the BB internal winning state, and the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 159(a), the replay symbols stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 are replay symbols with a symbol number counter value of 2 on the left reel 110 and replay symbols with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 14, which is the replay symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the left reel 110, is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the middle reel 111, and is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the right reel 112. It is located in the first frame. Therefore, the replay symbol alignment state shown in FIG. 159(a) is a state in which symbols (here, BB symbols) forming a specific symbol combination are brought close to each other between the reels, and hereinafter, this state is prepared. called eye condition. It is possible to easily win a specific symbol combination by ending the game in the preparation state and performing simultaneous pressing in the next game. That is, the preparatory state means a state in which the symbols of each reel constituting a specific symbol combination are within a certain range. In FIG. 159(a), by performing simultaneous pressing in the next game, it is possible to stop and display the BB pattern matching on the winning line L1 or any of the other winning lines L2 to 5 shown in FIG. is.

FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example in which Bell is internally won in the BB internal winning state, and the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 159(b), the bell symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the left reel 110 and a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 19 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 15, which is the bell symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol on the left reel 110 is located in the second and fourth frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111, and the BB symbol on the right reel 112 is three frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111. located in the eye. Therefore, the state of the bell pattern matching shown in FIG. 159(b) is also a preparatory state, and the game is ended in this preparatory state. is possible.

In this example, the configuration for entering the preparatory state is the configuration of the replay symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter and the configuration of the bell symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter. may be a watermelon pattern, a cherry pattern with a specific value of the pattern number counter, or a losing pattern with a specific value of the pattern number counter.

Also, the symbol combination that is in the preparation state does not need to be displayed in the symbol display window 113, and the relative positional relationship of the symbols (BB symbols) that make up the specific symbol combination is shown in FIG. 159(a). or the relative positional relationship shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, when the preparatory state is reached in the BB internal winning state, the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, or the like may notify the preparatory state.

FIG. 160 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, but only some of the operations are accepted. 146 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 146 will be mainly described. At the bottom of FIG. 160 are left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation.

In the example of FIG. 160, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h) , the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed. At the time of simultaneous pressing, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in the operation unacceptable state. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the simultaneous pressing operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 stops at the timing (h), but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue rotating at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). and the operation of the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 need to be operated again. At the timing of (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

FIG. 161 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed. 160 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 160 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 161, the simultaneous pressing operation is performed after all the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 have been detected. Therefore, when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready to be operated and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the (o) arrow), A simultaneous pressing operation is performed (timing of (h)). In response to the simultaneous pressing operation, brake control is performed on each of the three reels 110 to 112, and the three reels 110 to 112 are stopped simultaneously. That is, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for each of the reels 110 to 112 overlaps with each other. Note that all periods may overlap. Also, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built in the three stop buttons 137 to 139 respectively return to the first light emission mode at the same time. In addition, it stops at the same time. Strictly speaking, they seem to have stopped at the same time. and return at the same time. And to see the decrease, it seems to have returned at the same time. is.

FIG. 162 is a timing chart when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 157 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 157 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 162, after the three stop button lamps 137a-139a change to the second light emitting mode, the three stop buttons 137-139 are simultaneously pressed, and the three reels 110-112 appear to be simultaneous in terms of timing and stopped in terms of state. That is, the vibrating display is started almost simultaneously. For example, in the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). That is, here, a pseudo-game (simultaneous reel effect) is performed in which the three rotating reels 110 to 112 appear to stop at the same time as a effect by the simultaneous pressing operation.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started. In this game, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. In this game, even if the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, random delay processing is performed, and the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is stopped and displayed. is very unlikely to be possible. During execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is first detected ((f') timing), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e' ) timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing), and the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected differs between the pseudo game and the main game.

Also, in the present embodiment, the embodiment relates to the game of the slot machine 100, but the present invention is not limited to the slot machine, and can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [eg, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [eg, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 146, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by accepting the stop operation from the ready reel, the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted earlier than before. Therefore, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. In addition, there is a case where the presence of the game can be heightened by immediately responding to the player's operation. These effects are also common to the gaming machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as the first common effect.

The unstoppable state may be a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel cannot be accepted, or the operation can be accepted but is treated as a valid operation. It may also be a state in which it is not possible (the same applies below). On the other hand, the "stoppable state" refers to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel is accepted and the operation is treated as a valid operation (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, when the stop position of the reel becomes controllable, the rotating reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the reel control means may be means capable of transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the constant speed control, may be a means capable of shifting to a controllable state (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 146], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In some cases, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, (d ') timing] (same below).

Further, the stop operation means is a means including a first stop operation means [eg, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [eg, middle stop button 138]. The means [for example, the left stop button 137] is a means for stopping the rotating first reel by operating the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] in a stoppable state, The second stop operation means [for example, the middle stop button 138] is operated in a state where the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] can be stopped, so that the rotating second reel It may also be a means for stopping (the same applies below).

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received in a state where the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 146]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
" A first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the stop button can be operated earlier than before by receiving the stop operation from the ready reel.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation by the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 146, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
While the constant speed control is being performed on one reel [e.g., the left reel 110] of the plurality of reels, another reel [e.g. , right reel 112] is in the first abnormal state [for example, timing (g) shown in FIG. In some cases [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 147],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the first common effect, even if some of the reels are in the first abnormal state, the game can be continued with the remaining reels. In addition, the player may be able to concentrate on the game without wasting the rotation of the reels that did not cause the first abnormal state.

If the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled, the one reel will not shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

again,
`` A first abnormal state detection means [for example, a main control unit 300 that executes a step-out detection process shown in FIG. 139] for detecting that the reel has entered the first abnormal state,
While the constant speed control is being performed on one of the plurality of reels, a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels is in the first abnormal state. Also as [for example, the timing of (g) shown in FIG. 147], until the first abnormal state detecting means detects the first abnormal state of the other reel [for example, (a' shown in FIG. 147) )], the one reel can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 147],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 146], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means puts the stop position of the first reel in a controllable state before the stop position of the second reel can be controlled. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received in a state where the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 146]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
Even if the second reel rotation drive means steps out during the period in which the reel control means executes the constant speed control on the second reel, the stop by the first stop operation means Acceptance of operations is started,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the stop button can be operated earlier than before by accepting the stop operation from the prepared reel, and in addition, the player can play on some of the plurality of reels.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for increasing the rotation speed of the reel from a stopped state toward a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129]; Second constant speed control for maintaining a constant speed state [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129] a reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute at least
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 151, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (c), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
The reel control means may shift to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled before the second constant speed control is started [for example, timing (b) shown in FIG. ],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is not necessary to wait until the second constant speed control is started before the stop position of the reel can be changed to a controllable state, and the operation of the stop operation means is accepted at an earlier timing. will be available. Therefore, the first common effect is further enhanced.

The reel control means may be means capable of transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the second constant speed control, or during execution of the acceleration control, the reel control means It may be a means capable of shifting to a controllable state of the stop position of.

Further, the second constant speed control may be control for maintaining the constant speed state by being repeatedly executed.

again,
"When the rotational speed of the reel reaches the constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means performs the first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 129] after completing the acceleration control. Execute, and then execute the second constant speed control,
The second constant speed control is control that is repeatedly executed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Note that the first constant-speed control may be control using a current value (strong excitation) higher than the current value (for example, medium excitation) used in the second constant-speed control (the same applies below). .).

In the first constant speed control, the first control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 16 times], the control always shifts to the second constant-speed control. After the control pattern with a counter value of 0 to 7] is repeatedly executed an indefinite number of times [for example, until the light shielding piece is detected and the stop button is operated], the brake control is started.

Further, the reel control means is means capable of shifting to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 151]. good too.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 146], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (c) shown in 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. It is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"In a state where the reel control means is executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 151], the first detection signal is received, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
The reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is such that the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is detected within a predetermined period of time from the start of the acceleration control on the first reel. When output, it may start after the predetermined time has elapsed,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to detect the reel index before the constant speed flag is turned on, and it is possible to start accepting the reel stop operation earlier than performing the reel index detection after the constant speed flag is turned on.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

again,
"The reel control means is capable of executing a first constant-speed control and a second constant-speed control as the constant-speed control,
The reel control means executes the first constant-speed control on the first reel during at least a part of the period until the predetermined time elapses, and performs the second constant-speed control after the elapse of the predetermined time. exercising control over the first reel;
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, reel index detection during the first constant speed control becomes effective.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [eg, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [eg, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 146, the left stop button 137 shifts to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 shifts to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 accepts at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
When a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are continuously operated [for example, when a slide push is performed], the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means In the case of a stop possible state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 156], only reels corresponding to some stop operation means [for example, the left stop button 137] among all the operated stop operation means In the case of the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the slide push operation is performed, the first common effect can be obtained.

In addition, it may be the case that a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are continuously operated. The “plurality of reels” may be two reels out of three reels or three reels out of three reels.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated continuously, all of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means In other cases, the brake control is executed only for a part of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the brake control may be executed also for the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated next.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even in a state where control is being executed, there are cases where the stop operation means to be operated next is in the above-mentioned unstoppable state.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even in a state where control is being executed, the stop operation means to be operated next may also be in the stop possible state.

again,
``The above-mentioned ``when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in succession'' refers to a case in which an operation of continuously operating a plurality of stop operation means is performed by tracing.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 146], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means puts the stop position of the first reel in a controllable state before the stop position of the second reel can be controlled. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 146],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received in a state where the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 146]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
If the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are operated during the first period in the first case, the second stop operation means is invalidated. becomes,
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the second period after the first period in the first case, the second stop operation means The operation to the stop operation means is valid,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make a player who is enthusiastic about a game calm down by creating a situation in which even if a plurality of buttons are operated (slide push) in a short period of time, some of the games do not stop.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for increasing the rotation speed of the reel from the stopped state toward the constant speed state [for example, the acceleration control shown in FIG. 129] is repeated. A second constant speed control that maintains the constant speed state by being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and a brake control that shifts from the constant speed state to the stopped state brake control shown in 129] at least reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300],
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 146, the left stop button 137 shifts to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 shifts to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 accepts at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
When the rotational speed of the reel reaches the constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes the first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 129] after completing the acceleration control. and then the second constant speed control is executed,
One of the plurality of reels (hereinafter referred to as "first reel") [for example, left reel 110] has a plurality of types of symbols [for example, shown in FIG. 122(a)] along the rotation direction. "Left" pattern arrangement] is applied,
One pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is the first pattern [for example, the watermelon pattern shown in FIG. 152(c''-1) or the cherry pattern shown in FIG. 152(c''-2)]. can be,
The first symbol is a symbol that is advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed [for example, a symbol that wins a small winning combination];
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reel cannot be stopped while the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. Only stop button valid information is set],
When the reel control means shifts to a state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as "first state") during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, Timing of (b) shown in FIG. 151],
When the first state is entered during execution of the first constant-speed control [for example, timing (b) shown in FIG. 151], the second constant-speed control is started and the stop operation means is When operated [for example, the timing of (c′) shown in FIG. 151] When the first symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 152 (c″-1) or FIG. 152 (c″-2 )]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even reels provided with so-called DDT symbols can obtain the above-mentioned first common effect, and furthermore, an expert who can ascertain changes in speed of the reels can achieve the fastest timing. You will be able to win prizes in

It should be noted that, for example, when the first state is shifted to when the first constant-speed control is started, if the stop operation means is operated aiming at the start timing of the second constant-speed control, The first symbol may be stopped and displayed.

again,
"The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] has a first detection piece [for example, the light shielding piece 612D],
The first detection piece is detectable during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 151],
The reel control means shifts to the first state when the first detection piece is detected.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Among the plurality of reels, one reel that is different from the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the third case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 151], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (c) shown in 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The third case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. It is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"In a state where the reel control means is executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 151], the first detection signal is received, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the third case, the brake control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the brake control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second constant-speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated when the first state is entered while the first constant-speed control is being executed." The stop operation means is operated at a time when the first symbol can be stopped and displayed for the first time after the reel starts rotating.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
a first detection piece provided on the first reel;
a second detection piece provided on the second reel;
with
The first pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the first detection piece is detected,
The second pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the second detection piece is detected,
One of the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern,
The position of the first symbol is at least a position away from the position of the first detection piece toward the rear side in the rotation direction until a predetermined time has passed since the reel control means started the constant speed control. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first symbol can be pressed at the fastest speed after receiving the operation.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
After the brake control is executed and stopped, each reel constituting the plurality of reels that have started to rotate [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. It is possible to shift from the disabled state to the stoppable state [for example, shown in FIG. Transition to possible state, right stop button 139 transition to acceptable state at the timing of (f')],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a pseudo-game (second reel effect)],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels,
It is possible to shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state for each reel on which the random delay control is performed and the rotation is started [for example, timing (f′), (e′) shown in FIG. 157 or FIG. ) timing, (d′) timing],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, even a game machine equipped with random delay control can exhibit the above-mentioned first common effect. It can give sharpness to the game.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a effect in which the spinning reels are made to look like they are stopped.

again,
``The reel effect is a pseudo-game effect that seems to stop according to the operation of the stop operation means [for example, the timing of (h), the timing of (h'), and the timing of (h'')] is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case among the cases where the plurality of reels start to rotate after the brake control is executed and stopped [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 146 or in the case of the example shown in FIG. One reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 146 or timing (d′) shown in FIG. ],
In the second case of the case where the plurality of reels start spinning after the random delay control is performed after the reel effect is executed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 157 or the example shown in FIG. case], the second reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing of (e′) shown in FIG. 157 or FIG. 158] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. 146 (for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 146 or timing (d') shown in FIG. 155),
In the second case, the reel control means transitions to a state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled before transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled. [for example, the timing of (e') shown in FIG. 157 or FIG. 158],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received in a state where the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 146]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the first game in which the first case occurs, in the second game after the first game, the stop operation by the second stop operation means The acceptance start time may be earlier than the acceptance start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give a distinctness to the game by making the acceptance start timing of each stop operation means for the first game and the second game different.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, the first constant speed control or second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], there is a case where the stop impossible state transitions to the stop possible state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, if the stop operation means is operated without waiting for the notification by the notification means, the reels may be stopped, and the player's operation may be given priority, increasing the realism of the game. be. Also, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. These effects are common to the gaming machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as a second common effect.

The certain reel may always transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification is started (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the notification means may start notification that each reel is in the stoppable state when all of the plurality of reels are in the stoppable state. At the point when all the stop positions are changed to a controllable state, notification that each reel is in the stoppable state may be started (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 155], the first reel is moved from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transition to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, one reel constituting the plurality of reels is a third reel [for example, the middle reel 111], and the notification means also includes third notification means [for example, the middle stop button LED 138a]. and the third notification means is capable of executing a third notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the third reel is in the stoppable state. In some cases, the third reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the third notification is started by the third notification means. For example, the timing of (e) shown in FIG. 155] may be used (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In the fourth case, the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time when the second notification is started by the second notification means. It can be.

again,
"The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The timing at which the first notification is started by the first notification means and the timing at which the second notification is started by the second notification means may be the same (hereinafter the same). .

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Incidentally, among the plurality of reels, a reel [for example, the right reel 112] different from the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means There may be a case where the stop-impossible state transitions to the stop-possible state along with the start of the notification (the same applies hereinafter). That is, of the plurality of reels, the reel other than the certain reel for which the notification is started by the notification means is changed from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time when the notification is started. (The same shall apply below.)

Furthermore, the another reel may be the last reel among the plurality of reels to be able to control the stop position of the reel (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, at the timing when the notification is started for the certain reel, the notification for the other reel may also be started (the same applies hereinafter). The start timing of the notification and the start timing of the notification regarding the other reel in the notification means may be the same timing (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it can be stopped earlier than the conventional game machine, and the time between waits can be shortened.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When there is a power failure and power recovery after the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 155],
Before the notification about the certain reel (hereinafter referred to as "certain notification") is executed, the brake control of the certain reel is started (timing (h1) shown in FIG. 155). , the certain notification is not executed at the time when the notification is executed for a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] ((f) to (h3) shown in FIG. 155);
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the above-mentioned second common effect, misunderstandings are caused to the players by preventing the notification of the reel corresponding to the stop operation means that has been operated at an early stage. Consideration is made so as not to

Also, the notification of the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] [for example, notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) of the left stop button LED 137a or the middle stop button LED 138a] is executed. 155 before the brake control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing of (h1) shown in FIG. is not executed [for example, the timing of FIG. 155(f')].

That is, the brake control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state [for example, FIG. The timing of (h1) shown in 155] and the notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing of FIG. 155(f')].

It should be noted that if the brake control for the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel may The notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of all of the plurality of reels, including the reel that is the target reel, is started. Alternatively, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, The notification is not executed unless the stop positions of all of the plurality of reels including the reel to be stopped are shifted to a controllable state. Alternatively, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the informing means that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, The notification is not executed unless all of the plurality of reels including the reel to be stopped transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Further, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the plurality of The notification is not executed until after the brake control of all the reels other than the certain reel among the reels is completed.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 155], in a certain game [for example, a game in which the reels start rotating from the timing (a) shown in FIG. 155], the first reel Before the first notification is started by one notification means, the stop impossible state is shifted to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 155],
In the certain game, the brake control of the first reel is started before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, (d) shown in FIG. Timing], the first notification by the first notification means is not executed in the certain game,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
In the second case, if the first stop operation means is operated before the display start time of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means, the game in the second case The first display by the first operation reception display means is not displayed,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

This game machine does not mislead the players.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, the first constant speed control or second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 155],
Of the plurality of reels, the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] for a reel [for example, the right reel 112] other than the certain reel is started [for example , timing (f) shown in FIG. 155], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, and the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] is being executed [ For example, during the period started at the timing (f) shown in FIG. 155], the other reel is in the stoppable state.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, notification that a reel other than the certain reel [e.g., the right reel 112] among the plurality of reels is in the stoppable state [e.g., by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) Before the notification] is started by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. While the notification that the reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] is being executed by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, During the period started at the timing (f) shown in 155], the other reel is in the stoppable state.

Further, the other reel may always be in the non-stoppable state before the informing means starts informing that the other reel is in the stoppable state.

According to this game machine, while the second common effect is achieved, the stopping operation means can be operated while waiting for the notification, so that a beginner can play the game calmly, and the notification can be used to play the game. You can play games with peace of mind.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
The notification means is means including first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a] and second notification means [eg, middle stop button LED 137b],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means,
In the fourth case, the second reel is in the unstoppable state before the second notification is started, and the second reel is stopped after the second notification is started. is possible,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, Timing of (f) shown in 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 155], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
When the operation to the second stop operation means is performed during the third period in the second case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes invalid,
When an operation to the second stop operation means is performed during a fourth period after the third period in the second case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid,
The third period is a period during which the first display is not displayed by the second operation reception display means,
The fourth period is a period during which the first display is displayed by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, a period during which only the first stop operation means out of the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means is accepted and a period during which both are accepted are set by the display of the second operation reception display means. It may be suggested.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"Multiple reels and
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, the first constant speed control or second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 executing internal winning combination lottery processing shown in FIG. 131];
effect means [for example, effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)] capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the determined internal winning combination [for example, a minor combination suggestive effect shown in FIG. 154(A)];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], there is a case where the stop impossible state transitions to the stop possible state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 153],
The effect means performs the suggestive effect [for example, a small combination suggestive effect shown in (a1) in FIG. When starting execution [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 153] is a means,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the second common effect is more effectively exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect makes it possible to grasp the discard game, and in the case of the discard game, it is possible to quickly finish the game by performing a stop operation at a quick timing. It should be noted that the suggestive effect makes it possible to grasp the game of collecting a small winning combination, and in the game of collecting a small winning combination, it is possible to operate the stop operation means with care so as not to make a mistake in operation.

The effect means may be means for starting execution of the suggestive effect at the same time as the acceleration control of the certain reel is started, or the suggestive effect may be started when the certain reel starts rotating. may be a means for starting the execution of

Further, the effect means may always start execution of the suggestive effect before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 153], the first reel moves from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transitioning to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 153],
In the fifth case, the effect means, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. is a means of initiating the execution of a rendition,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 153].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 153], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the fifth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
production means capable of executing a suggestive production suggesting the determined internal winning combination;
with
The effect means may execute the suggestive effect in the second case,
In the second case, the execution start timing of the suggestive effect by the effect means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to quickly complete a discard game and prevent an erroneous operation in a small combination recovery game.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means." It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, the first constant speed control or second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 executing the internal winning combination lottery process shown in FIG. 131];
Effect means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of executing an instruction effect [for example, a navigation effect shown in FIG. (liquid crystal display device)],
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 153],
The effect means, before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, causes the stop operation means to stop the reel corresponding to the certain reel as execution of the instruction effect. In the case of starting execution of an effect [for example, the navigation effect shown in (a2) in FIG. 154(B)] including an operation instruction of the operation means [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 153]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are other effects in addition to the second common effect. That is, not only can a quick stop operation be performed while following the instruction performance, but even if a certain stop operation means is operated by mistake, the reel corresponding to the certain stop operation means will be in the unstoppable state. If so, the player will not lose the chance of winning a prize.

In addition, the effect means corresponds to the certain reel of the stop operation means as the execution of the instruction effect before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. It may be a means for always starting execution of an effect including an operation instruction of the stop operation means.

again,
"The order in which the respective reels constituting the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in the example shown in FIG. The order of operating the stop operation means provided for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels instructed by the instruction effect [for example, in the navigation effect shown in FIG. order] may be different,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The order in which the respective reels constituting the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, and the instruction effect are provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels. In some cases, the order of operating the respective stop operation means may be the same.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 153], the first reel moves from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transitioning to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 153],
In the fifth case, the effect means, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. As the execution of the effect, execution of the effect [for example, the navigation effect shown in (a2) in FIG. is a means to initiate
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 153].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 153], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the fifth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
effect means capable of executing an instruction effect capable of stopping the plurality of reels in a stop mode corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
with
The effect means may execute the instruction effect in the second case,
The instruction effect in the second case may include an operation instruction for the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the navigation game can be digested quickly.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When there is a power failure and power recovery after the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 157],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a pseudo-game (second reel effect)],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, shown in FIG. 157 or 158, Executed between the timing of (i) and the timing of (f')],
Of the plurality of reels that have been subjected to the random delay control and have started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is not notified of the other reel. 157 or 158, the transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state may occur before
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the notification is started by the notification means among the plurality of reels that have started to rotate after the random delay control is performed for each of the reels that constitute the plurality of reels on which the reel effect is executed. A reel other than the reel on which the reel is connected [e.g., right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., FIG. 157 or FIG. timing of (f′) shown in ].

According to this game machine, even a game machine equipped with random delay control can exhibit the above-mentioned second common effect. It is possible to give sharpness to the game.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a effect in which the spinning reels are made to look like they are stopped.

again,
"The reel effect is a effect of a pseudo-game [for example, the pseudo-game shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means including first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a] and second notification means,
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the sixth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 157 or 158], the first notification is started by the first notification means for the first reel [for example, the left reel 110]. 157 or 158 (d) shown in FIG. 157], and then the reel effect [for example, pseudo effect or reel action] is executed. is,
In the sixth case, the random delay control is performed following the reel effect [for example, between the timing (i) and the timing (f') shown in FIG. 157 or 158]. The second reel [for example, the right reel 112] that started the transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. 157 or FIG. Timing of (f') shown in 158],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the random delay control in the sixth case is performed, the first notification is started by the first notification means, and the first reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. [for example, the timing of (d′) shown in FIG. 157 or FIG. 158],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

It should be noted that, at the same time that the second notification is started by the second notification means, the first reel, which has been subjected to the random delay control in the sixth case and has started to rotate, is released from the unstoppable state. It may shift to the stop possible state.

again,
``The first reel is the reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (d') shown in FIG. 157 or 158]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 157 or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 157 or FIG. 158], the The second notification by two notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the sixth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the third game in which the second case occurs, in the fourth game after the third game, the stop operation by the second stop operation means The reception start time may be earlier than the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give the game a sharpness by making the receiving start timings of the stop operation means for the third game and the fourth game different.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When there is a power failure and power recovery after the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [eg, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [eg, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 160 and 161, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (e), and the right stop at timing (f). button 139 transition to acceptable state],
In the first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (e) in FIG. (h) shown in )], only some of the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, while the second period [for example, (o) in FIG. In the period indicated by the arrow of], when the simultaneous stop operation is performed [for example, the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 161], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, while responding to the quick operation of simultaneous pressing, there are cases where some of the reels do not stop, so that the player who is absorbed in the game can calm down.

In addition, in the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, all of the plurality of reels may be necessarily stopped (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the second period may be a period later than the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed for the second reel. may overlap at least part of the period of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, the brake control is performed for at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel and the second reel. At least a part of the period of time may necessarily overlap (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Further, the stop operation means is a means including a first stop operation means [eg, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [eg, middle stop button 138]. The means is a means for stopping the rotating first reel by operating the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means , the rotating second reel may be stopped by operating the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] in a stoppable state (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
``In the seventh case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 160], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel Timing of FIG. 160(d)],
The first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in (e) of FIG. 160] is a partial period in the seventh case,
In the first period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped,
In the eighth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 161], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 161(d)],
The second period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (O) in FIG. 161] is a partial period in the eighth case,
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] and the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] are stopped.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The power failure and power recovery [for example , power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. 149], the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example , the timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations in the plurality of stop operation means,
In the third case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed, the operation to the second stop operation means is performed. is invalid and
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, The operation to the second stop operation means is effective,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this game machine, a situation is created in which a part of the machines does not stop even if the simultaneous stop operation is performed, and the players who are absorbed in the game are calmed down.

again,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the first reel and at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the second reel The period of the part overlaps,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

again,
"After the third case, if there is a power failure and recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 129], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, the first constant speed control or second constant speed control shown in FIG. 129, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stop state reel control means [eg, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [eg, brake control shown in FIG. 129];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 139)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 160 and 162, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (e), and the right stop at timing (f). button 139 transition to acceptable state],
In the first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (e) in FIG. (h) shown in )], only some of the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, while the second period [for example, (o) in FIG. In the period indicated by the arrow of], when the simultaneous stop operation is performed [for example, the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 162], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped,
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, reel simultaneous effect],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, shown in FIG. 162, from timing (i) to (f ') timing],
After a certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110] first shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 162], and when the plurality of reels start rotating by performing the random delay control [for example, from the timing (i) shown in FIG. 162 (f ')], among the plurality of reels, a reel different from the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may first transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [ For example, the timing of (f′) shown in FIG. 162],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Even with this gaming machine, while responding to a quick operation of simultaneous pressing, there are cases where some of the reels do not stop, so that the player who is absorbed in the game can calm down. In addition, with random delay control in between, the situation of the reels changes, and the game can be given sharpness.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a simultaneous reel effect in which the plurality of rotating reels appear to stop at the same time [for example, the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 162].

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed for the second reel. may overlap at least part of the period of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``In the seventh case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 160], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel Timing of FIG. 160(d)],
In the seventh case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped [for example, FIG. Timing of (h) shown in],
In the eighth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 161], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 161(d)],
In the eighth case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [eg, left reel 110] and the second reel [eg, middle reel 111] are stopped [eg, FIG. Timing of (h) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"A power failure or power recovery occurs in a state in which the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 149, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 149(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations in the plurality of stop operation means,
In the third case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed, the operation to the second stop operation means is performed. is invalid and
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, The operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the fifth game in which the third case occurs, in the sixth game after the fifth game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means The acceptance start time may be earlier than the acceptance start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the reception start timing of each stop operation means for the fifth game and the sixth game is made different to give a sharpness to the game.

again,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the first reel and at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the second reel The period of the part overlaps,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

again,
"After the third case, if there is a power failure and recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the operation reception order is different before and after the power failure and power recovery, thereby giving the game a sharpness.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "seventh case" may be changed to "first case".

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above, and each of the embodiments has a special effect peculiar to the gaming machine. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the scope of the present invention. Any modification is also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

163 to 187, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below. 163 to 187 are used only for explanations using FIGS. 163 to 187 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 187, the symbols shown in FIGS. 163 to 187 are prioritized.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that progresses a series of games ending without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. FIG. 163 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 163 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 164, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed on the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the gap. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 164 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 163 requires 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the pay lines are activated. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines. Incidentally, the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 164) may be referred to as an active line area S1. Also, the area other than the effective line area S1 of the pattern display window 113 (the area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 in FIG. 164) may be referred to as the non-effective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state or special game to be described later. It is a lamp that informs the player of the status. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for presentation.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 165) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 165) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. , start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensors for reels 110-112 (index sensor 80), etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, L become a level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a plan view showing the array of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 0 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 2 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 Designs” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1, replay combinations 1-2, and small combinations 1-6. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, replay combinations 1 and 2 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay roles 1 and 2 may be called "operating roles". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of replay hands 1 and 2 is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" or "BB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The re-playing hands 1 and 2 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay combination 1 and "replay-replay-watermelon" for replay combination 2. Among the replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay" and the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "chance replay".

The replay hands 1 and 2 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 6 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-Cherry-ANY" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the small combination 2, and "Bell-Bell-Bell" for the small combination 3. 4 is "Replay-Bell-Bell", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell-Replay-Bell", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell-Bell-Replay". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "cherry", the small role 2 is "watermelon", the small role 3 is "bell", the small role 4 is "left bell", the small role 5 is "middle bell", and the small role 6 is sometimes referred to as the "right bell". In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the middle reel middle pattern of the middle reel 111 may be "Cherry", and the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may have any pattern.

Here, the small winning combination 3 (bell) is a winning combination regardless of the order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but the small winning combination 4 (left bell) and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell). And a small winning combination 6 (left bell) wins when the order of stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches a predetermined order of stop operations. For example, a small win 4 (left bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 110, and a small win 5 (middle bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111. A small win 6 (right bell) is won when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 112 . Hereinafter, the small wins 4 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push-order bells. In addition, the order of stop operation for winning the internally won push order bell is also called the correct order of stop operation.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT.

FIG. 168 shows 12 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 10), which are combinations of the combinations explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device numbers 1 and 2 are both internally winning combinations including special combination 1. Of these, condition device number 1 is an internal winning combination in which special combination 1 is won alone and there is no duplication with other combinations. When this winning combination is won internally, it becomes possible to win a special winning combination 1 (transition to a special game state (RT2)), but if no prize is won, a transition is made to a special winning internal winning state (RT1). In this case, unless another winning combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, the special winning combination 1 can be continuously won.

On the other hand, the condition device number 2 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 and another combination are duplicated and internally won. In this embodiment, the small winning combination and the replay winning combination are stopped with priority over the special winning combination. Therefore, in a game in which the special role 1 and another role are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that this other role will win (in the case of a replay role, the prize will always be won), but the special role 1 will win. do not do. It should be noted that the special combination internal winning state (RT1) is entered from the next game, and the special combination 1 can continue to be won as long as no other combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games.

Conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internal winning hands made up of replayed hands.

In addition, in the condition device numbers 2 and 4, the replay combination 1 and the replay combination 2 are won in duplicate. When these conditional devices are internally won, if a predetermined stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and if any other stop operation is performed, the replay combination 1 is displayed. Stop control is executed so that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the predetermined stop operation is the left first stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, not only the first stop operation but also the second stop operation may be included in the predetermined stop operation. Alternatively, the timing of the stop operation may be the predetermined stop operation described above, or a combination thereof, and any operation condition may be adopted.

Condition device numbers 5 to 10 are internal winning hands made up of small hands. Of these, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are provided with operation conditions (push order here, correct push order below) for winning the corresponding minor combination (left bell, middle bell, right bell). In the following description, the conditional device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the order of pressing the correct answer, it may be lost. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 168, the horizontal axis represents each game state (RT), and the vertical axis represents each lottery value (size of lottery data range). In each RT to be described later, the internal winning probability of a role is determined by selecting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and using random values acquired during the internal lottery. is obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of . For example, in the replay low probability state (RT0), the lottery value of special role 1 is 50, and the winning probability of special role 1 is 50/65536*100≈0.06%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for the lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values.

In the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 8 to 10 for each game state are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 163, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 169 is a transition diagram of the game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 169 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 is the most disadvantageous RT for the player because the internal winning probability of the replay combination is lower than that of RT1.

There are conditional device numbers 1 to 10 for internally won hands in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 169 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state, which will be described later.

<Special role internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. Also, the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0, and RT is more advantageous than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 3 to 10 in RT1 for internally won hands.

FIG. 169 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal winning probability of Bell (small combination 3) is higher than in other RTs, and medals can be easily obtained.

The condition device number 7 is the only internal winning combination in RT2. A small winning combination 3 that is internally won with the condition device number 7 is a winning combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 169 shows that in RT2, when the payout exceeds the specified number (324, see the remarks column in FIG. 167), the process shifts to RT0.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, RT2 ends when a specified number of payouts or more is executed, but for example, it ends when a predetermined combination (eg, single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (eg, 8 times), or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played, the game may end.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is not displayed. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In this embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of states of the advantageous section are provided: the normal state B, the chance state, and the AT state. FIG. 170 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for non-advantageous sections, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for advantageous sections. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous sections.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and it may be configured such that an internal winning is made to the pressing order bell at RT2 and an operation navigation is displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are met. Also, when the transition condition is satisfied, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions that are established when the points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in the normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance state>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted according to the internal winning combination. When the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games elapses, the game shifts to the normal state B, and when the number of AT sets is 0, the game shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments are lit up in a manner corresponding to the pressing order of the correct answer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (eg, 50) again, and if the AT set number is 0, the chance state is entered. conduct a lottery. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Incidentally, when the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of internal lottery in this embodiment).

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or bet buttons 130 and 132 have been operated), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, when any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when a replay is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is executed. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. And information that can specify the result of the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command including that the condition device numbers 8 to 10 have been internally won also includes operation instruction information representing the correct operation order of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. .

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small combination 2 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 170 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to interrupt statuses (acquiring various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137-139, reel Consists of 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) It is

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 173(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 173(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 173(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 173(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 173(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 174(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 174(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 174(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 174(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 174(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 174(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the presentation scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

[Configuration of push button]
175 and 176, the push button 600 used as the bet buttons 130, 132, stop buttons 137-139, etc. will be described below. 175 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 that constitutes the push button 600, and FIG. 176 is a sectional view showing the push button 600. As shown in FIG.

The push button 600 has a button body 610 (left-down hatching in FIG. 176), a button base 620 (vertical and horizontal cross-hatching in FIG. 176), and a return spring 630 (diagonal cross-hatching in FIG. 176). The button body 610 includes a button head 611 having transparency, a trunk portion 612 having a slightly smaller diameter than the button head 611, and two buttons provided on the opposite side of the button head 611 with the trunk portion 612 interposed therebetween. It has legs 613 . The button body 612 is a hollow body, and light from a separately provided light emitter (for example, an LED 720 on a substrate 700 to be described later) passes through the button body 612 and hits the button head 611, causing the button head 611 to emit light. configured so that it can The two leg portions 613 are each provided with an engaging portion 614 that engages with the button base 620 . Further, the tip of the leg portion 613 serves as a detection piece for a detection sensor 710, which will be described later.

The push button 600 is in a state in which the button body 610 and the return spring 630 are housed inside the button base 620 . FIG. 176(A) shows push button 600 in a state in which button body 610 is not pressed (hereinafter referred to as a non-pressed state). In this non-pressed state, the elastic force of the return spring 630 pushes the button body 610 in the direction opposite to the pressing direction, but the locking portion 614 is locked to the button base 620, so the button body 610 can be pressed. It is in a fixed position. When the button body 610 is pressed from this state, the state shown in FIG. 176B (hereinafter referred to as the pressed state) is obtained. In this pressed state, the force of pressing the button body 610 causes the return spring 630 to contract, the locking portion 614 to separate from the button base 620 , and the button body 610 is pushed until the button head 611 is locked by the button base 620 . After that, when the button body 610 is no longer pressed, it returns to the non-pressed state shown in FIG. 176(A). With the configuration described above, the push button 600 allows the button body 610 to move within a certain range.

Next, a configuration for detecting movement due to pressing of the button body 610 described above will be described. 177 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between button body 610 and detection sensor 710. FIG. 177(A1) and (B1) show the positional relationship when viewed from the same direction as in FIG. FIG. 177A2 is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 177A1. FIG. 177(B2) is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 177(B1). Note that the button base 620 and the return spring 630 are omitted in these figures.

This detection sensor 710 has a light-emitting element 711 and a light-receiving element 712, and a leg portion 613 that moves in the pressing direction when the button body 610 is pressed corresponds to a detection area ( By being inserted into a region where the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 are connected, light shielding is detected. FIGS. 177A1 and 177A2 show that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed. 177(B1) and (B2) show that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state. With this configuration, pressing of the push button 600 is detected. In the non-pressed state, the leg 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712, but the leg 613 is in a standby state in the space defined by the detection sensor 710. ing. By standing by at this position in a non-pressed state, it is possible to quickly detect that the button body 610 has been pressed. In addition, since the amount of movement of the button body 610 can be reduced in this configuration, the durability of the push button 600 can be improved.

In the push button 600 described above, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 plays two roles: a detection piece for detecting depression and a locking portion for locking to the button base 620 . In this way, the button body 610 can be made less likely to be damaged by simplifying the structure of both the detection piece and the locking portion. In the example of FIG. 175, a configuration in which a plurality of (two in the drawing) leg portions 613 are provided on the button body 610 has been described, but a configuration in which only one leg portion including a detection piece and a locking portion is provided. may be Also, when a plurality of legs 613 are provided, one leg 613 may be set as a detection target as in the example of FIG. A person who intends to do so can be made to play the role of a dummy detection piece, making it difficult to commit fraud.

In the example of FIG. 175, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 has a flat shape in the radial direction of the button body 610, but the shape of the leg portion 613 is not limited. As in the example of (A), the leg portion 613 may be flat in the circumferential direction. 178(B) and (C) show the positional relationship between the leg portion 613 and the detection sensor 710 when the button body 610 of FIG. 178(A) is employed. FIG. 178(B) shows that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed, and FIG. 178(C). shows that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state.

In the examples of FIGS. 175 and 178A, the configuration in which the locking portion 614 protrudes inside the button body 610 has been described. The arrangement and orientation of the engaging portion 614 are not limited.

[Detection sensor and board placement for multiple button bodies]
When using the push button 600 described above, a plurality of push buttons 600 may be arranged side by side like the three stop buttons 137 to 139 of the stop button unit 136 in FIG. The positional relationship between the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 will be described below with reference to FIG. 179 when a plurality of push buttons 600 described above are arranged. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the layout of the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 . It should be noted that illustration of the button base 620 and the return spring 630 is omitted in this figure.

179(A), (B), and (C) show three button bodies 610 (hereinafter referred to as left button body 610L, middle button body 610C, and right button body 610R, respectively) arranged in a direction orthogonal to the pressing direction. )It is shown. These button bodies 610 are provided with a detection sensor 710 for detecting depression of one of the legs 613 . These detection sensors 710 are provided on a common substrate 700 . In addition to the detection sensor 710 , the substrate 700 is provided with three LEDs 720 for individually causing the three button bodies 610 to emit light from the inside, and a harness connector 730 . The harness connector 730 is connected to a harness (connection cable) that connects a device to which the detection signal of the push button 600 is to be sent, such as the substrate of the main control unit 300 .

179A, 179B, and 179C, all of the leg portions 613 of the three button bodies 610 are aligned in a straight line. In FIG. 179(A), the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C are provided with the detection sensor 710 on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other, and the detection sensor 710 is provided on the left leg 613 of the right button body. is provided. In FIG. 179(B), similarly to FIG. 179(A), the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C are provided with detection sensors 710 on the leg portions 613 adjacent to each other. 179A in that a detection sensor 710 is provided on a leg portion 613 of FIG. In FIG. 179C, the detection sensors 710 of the three button bodies 610 are all provided on the right leg 613 .

As shown in FIGS. 179A and 179B, when a structure in which two detection sensors 710 are arranged close to each other on the substrate 700 is adopted, the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced or a space can be secured on the substrate 700. can be For example, the substrate 700 in FIG. 179(A) is smaller than the substrate 700 in FIG. 179(C). In the example of FIG. 179(A), the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced while the connector 730 is arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R. Also, in FIG. 179(B), the distance between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button body 610C and the right button body 610R is wider than in the example of FIG. 179(C). In the example of FIG. 179(B), a larger connector 730 can be arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R.

The effect of reducing the size of the substrate 700 or securing the space on the substrate 700 described above is achieved by the two adjacent button bodies 610 (the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C in FIGS. 179A and 179B). It occurs by bringing the detection sensor 710 as close as possible. Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the leg portions 613 are arranged in a straight line as in the examples of FIGS. Of these, a configuration in which the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg portion 613 closer to the button body 610 may be adopted.

Also, when the detection sensors 710 of two adjacent button bodies 610 are configured to be as close as possible, the positional relationship between these detection sensors 710 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610 . For example, in FIGS. 179A and 179B, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L, and the position of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L. Relationships are different. On the other hand, in FIG. 179C, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L and the positional relationship of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L are are the same.

In the configuration of FIG. 179(C), when the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to one of the button bodies 610 is known, it is easy to guess the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the other button bodies 610, which facilitates fraud. can be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 179A and 179B, when the positional relationship between the detection sensors 710 in two adjacent button bodies 610 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610, Since the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the button body 610 is different for each button body 610, fraud can be made difficult. In order to achieve this effect, it is not essential to bring the detection sensors 710 of the two adjacent button bodies 610 as close as possible.

In the example of FIG. 179, the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is the same as the pressing direction, but the orientation of the substrate is not particularly limited. It may be configured to FIG. 180 shows an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is perpendicular to the pressing direction. Depending on the orientation of the substrate 700, the overall size can be made more compact in some cases.

[Operation example of additional notification effect]
As described above, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, when the AT state is set, operation navigation may be executed. FIG. 181(A) shows an example of the background in the AT state, and FIG. 181(B) shows operation navigation superimposed on the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 181(A). An example is shown. In the AT state, the number of AT remaining games is decreased as the game progresses, but this number of AT remaining games may be added. At this time, a configuration is adopted in which an operation means including the chance button 190 is used to execute an effect for informing of the addition. FIG. 181(C) shows an example of an effect prompting the operation of the chance button 190 (hereinafter referred to as chance button operation display), and FIG. An example of numerical display) is shown. In the examples of FIGS. 181(C) and 181(D), backgrounds different from those of FIGS. 181(A) and 181(B) are used. FIG. 181(B) shows an example of displaying operation navigation in a state where the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 181(A) is displayed. may be displayed.

The operation of these effects will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description of the operation example, the AT state is assumed unless otherwise specified. In addition, operations (corresponding to timings T1 to T6) are performed in the order of start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation, bet operation, and start operation, and the chance button 190 is pressed during these operations. A case where an operation (corresponding to timing TC) interrupts will be described.

[[Operation example (1)]]
FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 182, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 181(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Then, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the number of G added to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (2)]]
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of AT remaining games is increased. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 183, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 181(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the number of G added to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (3)]]
FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the bet operation and the start operation (between timings T5 and T6) when the number of AT remaining games is increased. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 184, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) to notify that the lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display is switched to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) without executing the additional G number display, and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned off. switch to. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed.

After that, when the chance button 190 is operated before the start operation (timing TC), the effect image display device 157 maintains the background display during AT, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. . If the chance button 190 is not operated until the next start operation (timing T6), the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state when the start operation is performed. Also, in this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (4)]]
FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 185, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 181(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 do not turn on, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. This is because the replay combination is internally won and no bet operation is required. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Therefore, regarding the bet operation (timing T5) after the third stop operation, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the lamp states of various buttons are maintained as they are (they do not change). ). Then, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the additional G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (5)]]
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 186, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 181(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the number of G added to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. Here, when the bet operation is not performed after the chance button 190 is operated, similar operations (switching of the display and switching of the lighting mode of the lamp) are executed by the subsequent start operation. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (6)]]
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 187, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 181(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display contents are switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 181(D)), and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the ON state to the OFF state. At this time, since the operation of the chance button 190 is no longer necessary due to the execution of the display of the number of G to be added, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. Regarding the operation (timing TC) of the chance button 190 after the bet operation, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the status of the lamps of various buttons are maintained (not changed) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. ).

After that, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 181(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 181 (B)) is being executed. there is

It should be noted that if the next start operation is performed without performing either the bet operation or the chance button 190 operation after the third stop operation, the display of the effect image display device 157 changes from the chance button operation display to the background during AT. The display is switched to (FIG. 181(A)), the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (1)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above makes it possible to display the additional G number using the chance button 190 (for example, FIG. 185), and for a certain period (from the start operation to the third stop operation in the above example). ), if the chance button 190 is not operated, then an opportunity is provided to display the additional G number by operating the chance button 190 or betting (for example, FIGS. 186 and 187). In this configuration, even if the player does not notice that it is an opportunity to display the additional G number by operating the chance button 190, the display of the additional G number can be performed by other operation means. There is, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the additional G number display. It should be noted that the above configuration may be applied not only to the display of the number of G to be added, but also to any notification. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is an example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably perform the notification by operating the operating means. In addition, when the notification is executed by an operation means different from the prompt operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operating device is provided with a light emitting device and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the device.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (2)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above is such that when the chance button 190 is operated prior to the betting operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the operation of the chance button 190 and the subsequent betting operation are performed. 183 and 186). On the other hand, if the bet operation is performed first, the display contents are switched by the bet operation, but the chance button 190 184 and 187 for example). With this configuration, it is possible to change the display contents according to the player's operation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that display contents to be switched are not limited to various notifications and background displays, and various displays can be used. Also, the operation means in the above operation example is an example, and may be related to the progress of the game or may be dedicated to the effect.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably switch the display contents by operating the operating means. Also, when the display contents are switched by an operation means different from the prompted operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operating device is provided with a light emitting device and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the device.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (3)]
In the configuration of the additional notification effect described above, in the case of executing the additional G number display (for example, FIG. 187) for the bet operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), and the background during AT is displayed There is a case (for example, FIG. 186), and in the former case, there is a case (for example, FIG. 187) in which the background is displayed during AT by the subsequent start operation.

With this configuration, the background can be easily displayed during AT, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that these display contents are only examples, and various types of display such as various notifications and background displays may be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects. As for these operation means, each operation means may be provided with a light emitting means so that the light emission state can be switched in order to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock ball game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a pressing portion (for example, a button body 610) to be pressed;
a base (e.g., button base 620) that engages with the depressing portion to make the depressing portion movable;
a sensor (for example, a detection sensor 710) for detecting a pressing operation of the pressing portion;
An operating means (e.g., push button 600) comprising
The pressing part has a leg (for example, leg 613),
The leg portion is provided with a locking portion (locking portion 614) that locks to the base portion,
The sensor detects the movement of the leg (see, for example, FIG. 177),
Operating means characterized in that:

Further, the operation means described above,
The sensor is provided with a detection area (for example, a detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712) in a space sandwiched between opposing walls (for example, in a space partitioned by the detection sensor 710), Detecting the passage of an object in the detection area,
When the pressing portion is in a non-pressing state, the leg portion enters a space sandwiched between the wall portions outside the detection area of the sensor (for example, FIG. 177 (A2)). reference),
Operating means characterized in that:

Further, the operation means described above,
The pressing part has a plurality of legs (for example, FIG. 175),
one of the plurality of legs is the leg to be detected by the sensor (e.g., FIG. 177);
Operating means characterized in that:

again,
a first operation means (for example, the left button main body 610L in FIGS. 179(A) and (B)), which is the operation means described above;
the second operation means (for example, the middle button body 610C in FIGS. 179(A) and (B)), which is the operation means described above;
An operating unit comprising
The first operating means and the second operating means are arranged side by side,
The positional relationship of the sensor of the second operating means with respect to the sensor of the first operating means differs from the positional relationship of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means (for example, FIG. 179(A) ( B) see),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
Among the legs of the first operation means, the leg closest to the second operation means is the detection target leg,
Among the legs of the second operation means, the leg closest to the first operation means is the detection target leg (see, for example, FIGS. 179(A) and (B)),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
the legs of the first operating means and the legs of the second operating means are arranged in a row (see, for example, FIGS. 179(A) and (B));
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
the third operation means (for example, the right button body 610R in FIGS. 179A and 179B), which is the operation means described above;
The sensor of the first operation means, the sensor of the second operation means, the sensor of the third operation means, and a connector (for example, a harness connector) to which cables for transmitting signals from these sensors are connected 730) provided with a substrate (e.g., substrate 700),
The first operating means, the second operating means, and the third operating means are arranged in a row in this order,
The leg portion of the first operation means, the leg portion of the second operation means, and the leg portion of the third operation means are arranged in a row,
The connector is arranged between the sensor of the second operating means and the sensor of the third operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 179(A) and (B)),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Also, a game machine is described, which is characterized by having the operating means described above.

Also, a game machine is described, which is characterized by having the operation unit described above.

Also, in the description above,
a first operating means (for example, the chance button 190);
a second operating means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132);
a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, display of added G number in FIG. 181(D));
A game table comprising
The notification means may execute the predetermined notification based on the operation of the first operation means during a first period (for example, from the start of reel rotation until the third stop operation is performed). means (see, for example, FIG. 185),
The notifying means, when the first operating means is not operated during the first period, indicates that either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated during the subsequent second period. Means that may execute the predetermined notification based on what has been done (see, for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) is provided,
The display means can execute display prompting the operation of the first operation means (for example, display of chance button operation in FIG. 181(C)) until the first operation means is operated in the first period. is a means of
The display means is means capable of displaying a prompt to operate the first operation means until the first operation means is operated during the second period (for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
The display means is a means for not executing a display prompting the operation of the second operation means during the second period.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means has a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the chance button 190),
The second operating means has a second light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the bet buttons 130 and 132),
The first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the first period (for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the second period (for example, FIGS. 186 and 187);
The second light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the second period (for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation means is an operation means for executing production,
The second operating means is a bet button,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The first period is a period including a period from when the plurality of reels start rotating to when the final stop operation is performed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When a replay is given as a result of a game that includes the first period, the second period becomes (for example, FIGS. 185 to 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first operating means (for example, the chance button 190);
a second operating means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132);
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game table comprising
The display means changes or adds display content based on operation of either the first operation means or the second operation means during a predetermined period (for example, after the third stop operation). means that may be implemented (see, for example, FIGS. 183, 184, 186, 187),
The display means executes display content change or addition based on the operation of the first operation means during the predetermined period, and then displays based on the operation of the second operation means. means that may change or add content (see, for example, FIGS. 183 and 186);
The display means changes or adds display contents based on the operation of the second operation means during the predetermined period, and then displays the display contents based on the operation of the first operation means. Means that does not change or add content (see, for example, FIGS. 184 and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means has a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the chance button 190),
The second operating means has a second light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the bet buttons 130 and 132),
the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 183, 184, 186, and 187);
The second light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 183, 184, 186, and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation means is an operation means for executing production,
The second operation means is a bet button,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The predetermined period is a period during which the plurality of reels are not rotationally driven.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined period is a period in which a replay is given as a result of the game (see, for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a second operating means (eg, start lever 135);
Display means (for example, the effect image display device 157) capable of executing the first display (for example, the display of the number of added Gs in FIG. 181(D)) and the second display (for example, the background display in FIG. 181(A)) When,
A game machine comprising
The display means may execute the first display based on the operation of the first operation means for a predetermined period (for example, after the third stop operation) (for example, 187),
The display means is a means that may execute the second display based on the operation of the first operation means during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIG. 186),
The display means executes the first display based on the operation of the first operation means, and then executes the second display based on the operation of the second operation means. (See, for example, FIG. 187)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation means is a bet button,
The second operating means is a start lever,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The predetermined period is a period in which the plurality of reels are not rotationally driven.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined period is a period in which a replay is given as a result of the game (see, for example, FIGS. 186 and 187),
A game machine characterized by:

100 slot machine 101 main body 102 front door 110 left reel 111 middle reel 112 right reel 700 reel units 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 144L left side lamp 144R right side lamp 157 effect image display device 160U effect movable body Unit 165 First chance button 166 Second chance button 167 Left button 168 Right button 180 Hopper unit 190 First selection switch 194 Second selection switch 272 Upper speaker 277 Bass speaker 740 Backlight module HD1 First operation prompt display HD2 Second operation Promotion display 165D First button display 166D Second button display LD1, LD2 Character display RD10, RD20 Operation result display RD11, RD21 Frame display RD12 Game number display RD22 Character display 300B Main control board 24ML Main control 24V monitor LED
5ML Main control 5V monitor LED
24MC Main control 24V capacitor 400B First sub-control board 24SL Sub-control 24V monitor LED
5SL Sub-control 5V monitor LED
24SC Sub-control 24V capacitor 252B Power control board 24PL Power control 24V monitor LED
5PL Power supply control 5V monitor LED
24PC power control 24V capacitor 5PC power control 5V capacitor

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object,
light emitting means;
a first movable body unit having a first movable body operable by being driven by a first motor;
a second movable body unit having a second movable body operable by being driven by a second motor;
A game machine comprising
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness ,
The second motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness ,
When the light emitting means emits light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state and receiving a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. there is
The light emitting means also emits light when the second movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the second motor, and a current due to counter electromotive force generated by the second motor flows in . may be
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the second motor is driven.
It is characterized by

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [e.g., motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [e.g., harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light-emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the de-energized state to drive the second motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
explained.
again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The first harness includes a first motor-side harness [eg, harness MR12] and a first light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MR11],
The certain board is electrically connected to the first motor [e.g., motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [e.g., harness MR12],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2] and a second light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1],
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the second light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1]. be,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 30] characterized by: 』
also explained.

Claims (5)

light emitting means;
a first movable body unit having a first movable body operable by being driven by a first motor;
a second movable body unit having a second movable body operable by being driven by a second motor;
A game machine comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means,
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The light emitting means is provided on a substrate,
a detachable first harness that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: The game machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 3,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state,
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power failure state,
When the second motor is driven by manually operating the second movable body in a de-energized state, the light-emitting means also emits light due to the current generated by the back electromotive force.
A playground characterized by:

Images